Panasonic DC GH5 Operating Instructions For Advanced Features UGA EN

User Manual: panasonic DC-GH5 - Operating Instructions for Advanced Features Free User Guide for Panasonic Camera, Manual - page1

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 348 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,
and save this manual for future use.
Operating Instructions
for advanced features
Digital Camera
Model No. DC-GH5
DVQP1121ZA
F0317HN0
until
2017/3/23
Message Display P328
Troubleshooting P330
Finding the information you need P2
Contents P4
Contents by Function P10
Menu list P204
2
Finding the information you need
In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you
need from the following pages.
By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the
information.
Search from “Contents”
Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.
P4
Search from the list of function names P10
Search from the list of buttons and dials P16
Search from the list of screens and icons P321
Search from “Message Display” P328
Search from “Menu list”
Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.
P204
Search from “Troubleshooting” P330
Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.
Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.
For details on how to use this manual, see the next page. P3
Wi-Fi® function/Bluetooth® function P264
3
How to use this manual
∫About the symbols in the text
• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.
• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060).
• The screen illustrations in these operating instructions assume that [Style] in [Clock Set] (P39)
is set to [Y.M.D] and [System Frequency] (P240) is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)].
About the indication of the applicable mode
Applicable modes:
The icons indicate the modes available for a function.
• Black icons: Applicable modes
• Grey icons: Unavailable modes
, and will differ depending on the Recording Modes registered under
custom settings.
: Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.
: Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.
: Tips for skilful use and points for recording.
: Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
: Continued to next page.
In these operating instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.
Example: In the [Rec] menu, change [Quality] from [A] to [›]
> [Rec] > [Quality] > [›]
MENU
Wi-Fi
MENU
4
Contents
Finding the information you need..............................................................................2
How to use this manual.............................................................................................3
Contents by Function ..............................................................................................10
1. Before Use
Care of the camera .................................................................................................13
Standard Accessories .............................................................................................15
Names and Functions of Components....................................................................16
About the Lens........................................................................................................19
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................20
Charging the Battery ...............................................................................................21
• Charging.........................................................................................................21
• Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures....................23
Inserting/Removing the Battery...............................................................................27
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)..................................................................28
Card Information .....................................................................................................30
• Formatting the card (initialisation) ..................................................................31
• Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording time ....32
Attaching/Removing the Lens .................................................................................34
Opening the Monitor ...............................................................................................38
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set).................................................................................39
• Re-adjusting the clock ....................................................................................40
Basic Operations.....................................................................................................41
• Tips for taking good pictures ..........................................................................41
• Using the Viewfinder.......................................................................................42
• Shutter button (Taking pictures) .....................................................................43
• Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures).........................................44
• Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode) .......................................................44
• Front Dial/Rear Dial........................................................................................45
• Control Dial.....................................................................................................47
• Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button ...............................................................48
• Joystick...........................................................................................................48
• [DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)......................................49
• Touch screen (Touch operations) ...................................................................52
• Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function .....................................................53
Setting menu items .................................................................................................55
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)...........................................58
• Customising the Quick Menu settings ............................................................59
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (function buttons) ....................60
Entering Text ...........................................................................................................64
5
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function (Intelligent Auto Mode) ...................65
• [Intelligent Auto] menu....................................................................................68
• Taking pictures with customised colour, defocus control, and brightness
settings...........................................................................................................69
Taking Pictures with Automatically Adjusted Aperture and Shutter Speed
(Programme AE Mode) ...........................................................................................70
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/Shutter Speed.....................................72
• Aperture-Priority AE Mode .............................................................................73
• Shutter-Priority AE Mode................................................................................73
• Manual Exposure Mode .................................................................................74
• Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode) .............76
• Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE) .......77
Taking Pictures with different image effects (Creative Control Mode).....................78
Registering your preferred settings (Custom Mode) ...............................................84
• Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings) ..............84
• Recording using registered custom set ..........................................................85
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Automatically ................................................................................86
Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)................................................................88
• Customising the operation settings of Auto Focus for picture taking..............89
Setting the Auto Focus Mode..................................................................................91
Specifying the AF area position ..............................................................................95
• Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen ...................................96
• Specifying the AF area position with the joystick............................................98
• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad ......................................99
• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function .............................100
Adjusting Focus Manually .....................................................................................101
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ................................................104
Compensating the Exposure.................................................................................105
Setting the Light Sensitivity...................................................................................107
Adjusting the White Balance .................................................................................109
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode..............................................................................................112
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.........................................................................113
Recording 6K/4K Photos.......................................................................................116
• Notes on the 6K/4K Photo function ..............................................................120
Selecting pictures from 6K/4K burst file and saving..............................................123
• Correcting 6K/4K Photos After Recording (Post-Recording Refinement) ....124
• Operations during selecting pictures/Selecting pictures on the
TV screen.....................................................................................................125
Controlling Focus After Recording (Post Focus/Focus Stacking) .........................128
6
• Recording with the Post Focus function .......................................................128
• Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture .................................130
• Merging multiple pictures to widen the focus range (Focus Stacking)..........131
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer........................................................................133
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation .............................134
• Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals ([Time Lapse Shot]) .............134
• Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion Animation]) ............................136
• Creating motion pictures from recorded pictures .........................................138
Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting Automatically (Bracket Recording) .....139
• Exposure Bracket .........................................................................................140
• Aperture Bracket ..........................................................................................141
• Focus Bracket ..............................................................................................141
• White Balance Bracket .................................................................................142
• White Balance Bracket (Colour Temperature) ..............................................142
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabiliser.....................................................................................................143
Taking Pictures with the Zoom ..............................................................................147
• Raising the telescopic effect.........................................................................148
• Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom) ...........................................152
Taking Pictures with the External Flash (Optional)................................................153
Setting the Flash Functions ..................................................................................155
• Changing the firing mode .............................................................................155
• Changing Flash Mode ..................................................................................156
• Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro...............................................................157
• Adjust the flash output..................................................................................158
• Synchronising the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation .........158
Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes..................................................................159
• Using other settings for wireless flash recording ..........................................161
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture......................................................................................162
• Setting the format, size and frame rate ........................................................163
• How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF]) .........167
• Customising the operation settings of Auto Focus for motion picture
recording ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]) .......................................................167
• Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures...............................168
• Setting the recording method of time code...................................................169
• Displaying/setting the sound input level .......................................................170
• Recording images with superimposed recording dates
([Time Stamp Rec]) ......................................................................................171
• Displaying colour bars/Outputting a test tone...............................................172
Recording Motion Pictures in Creative Video Mode..............................................173
• Recording with minimum white saturation by compressing overexposed
portions (Knee).............................................................................................175
7
• Recording in Slow or Fast Motion ([Variable Frame Rate]) ..........................176
• Moving the focus position smoothly to a registered position
([Focus Transition]) ......................................................................................178
• Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a
Fixed Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping])................................................179
• [Creative Video] menu ..................................................................................182
Recording Motion Pictures Using a Connected External Device ..........................187
• External monitor/recorder (HDMI output during recording) ..........................187
• External Microphone (optional) ....................................................................192
• XLR Microphone Adaptor (optional) .............................................................194
• Headphone...................................................................................................195
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures ...........................................................................................196
Playing Back Motion Pictures................................................................................197
• Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture ................................................198
Switching the Playback Method ............................................................................199
• Using the Playback Zoom ............................................................................199
• Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback) ...............................................200
• Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback) ......................200
Playing Back Group Pictures ................................................................................201
Deleting Pictures...................................................................................................203
9. Using Menu Functions
Menu list................................................................................................................204
• Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes.....................204
• [Rec] menu ...................................................................................................205
• [Motion Picture] menu ..................................................................................221
• [Custom] menu .............................................................................................223
• [Setup] menu ................................................................................................235
• [My Menu] menu...........................................................................................245
• [Playback] menu...........................................................................................246
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
What you can do with the Wi-Fi®/Bluetooth® function ...........................................264
Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function ..........................................................................265
Connecting to a smartphone/tablet .......................................................................267
• Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App” .......................................267
• Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy ...........................268
• Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy ................270
• Changing the Wi-Fi connection method .......................................................272
• Terminating the Wi-Fi connection .................................................................273
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet ...................................................................274
• Turning on/off the camera with a smartphone ..............................................274
• Taking images via a smartphone (remote recording) ...................................275
8
• Playing back/saving images stored on the camera, or uploading them on
social media sites.........................................................................................277
• Transferring recorded images to a smartphone automatically .....................278
• Backing up images to a Cloud Storage automatically
(Auto Cloud Backup) ....................................................................................279
• Recording location information to the camera’s images...............................282
• Synchronising the camera’s clock with a smartphone..................................283
• Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone .............................283
Displaying pictures on a TV ..................................................................................284
Sending images ....................................................................................................285
Sending images to a smartphone/tablet................................................................287
Printing Wirelessly.................................................................................................288
Sending images to AV device ...............................................................................289
Sending images to PC ..........................................................................................290
Using Web services ..............................................................................................292
• When sending images to web service..........................................................292
• When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........................................295
• About the [LUMIX CLUB] .............................................................................296
About Wi-Fi connections .......................................................................................299
• Connecting via a wireless access point (via the network) ............................300
• Connecting the camera and another device directly (direct connection)......302
• Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones
([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]) ....303
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ...............................................................................................305
11. Connecting to other equipment
Watching 4K motion pictures on a TV/ Saving 4K motion pictures on your PC
or recorder ............................................................................................................307
• Watching motion pictures in 4K ....................................................................307
• Storing 4K motion pictures ...........................................................................307
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .................................................................308
• Using VIERA Link (HDMI) ............................................................................309
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on your PC ............................................310
• Downloading software ..................................................................................311
• Transferring images to a PC.........................................................................313
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a Recorder .......................................315
Printing the Pictures..............................................................................................316
9
12. Others
Optional accessories.............................................................................................319
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display.......................................................................321
Message Display...................................................................................................328
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................330
Cautions for Use ...................................................................................................339
10
Contents by Function
Recording
Recording Mode ..............................P44
[Preview]..........................................P76
[Time Lapse Shot] .........................P134
[Stop Motion Animation] ................P136
Aperture Bracket ...........................P141
Focus Bracket ...............................P141
[Silent Mode] .................................P216
[Multi Exp.].....................................P220
6K/4K photo
[6K/4K PHOTO].............................P116
[Reduce Rolling Shutter] ...............P124
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]....P124
[Post Focus] ..................................P128
Focus (AF/MF)
[Focus Mode]...................................P88
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ........... P89
[AF Mode]........................................P91
Adjusting the AF area position ........ P95
Manual Focus................................P101
[AF/AE Lock] .................................P104
[AF Custom Setting(Video)].......... P167
Drive
[Drive Mode] .................................. P112
[Burst] ............................................P113
Maximum number of pictures that
can be taken continuously .............P114
[Self Timer] ....................................P133
Picture Quality and Colour Tone
[Sensitivity].....................................P107
[White Balance]..............................P109
[Picture Size]..................................P206
[Quality]..........................................P207
[Photo Style] ..................................P208
[Filter Settings]...............................P210
[Color Space] .................................P211
[Highlight Shadow].........................P212
[i.Dynamic] .....................................P213
[i.Resolution] ..................................P213
[Long Shtr NR] ...............................P215
[Shading Comp.] ............................P215
[Diffraction Compensation] ............P216
[HDR] .............................................P219
Exposure
[Touch AE] .......................................P54
[One Push AE] .................................P77
[AF/AE Lock]..................................P104
Exposure Compensation ...............P105
Exposure Bracket ..........................P140
[Metering Mode].............................P212
Stabiliser
Dual I.S. .........................................P143
5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser.......P143
Flash
[Flash Mode] ..................................P156
2nd curtain synchro .......................P157
[Flash Adjust.] ................................P158
Wireless flash settings...................P159
Recording
11
Motion Picture
[Rec Format]..................................P163
[Rec Quality]..................................P163
Motion pictures in 4K ..................... P164
Recording still pictures while
recording motion pictures ..............P168
Creative Video Mode
[Variable Frame Rate] ...................P176
[Focus Transition]..........................P178
[4K Live Cropping].........................P179
[Anamorphic(4:3)]..........................P182
[Loop Recording (video)] ...............P183
[Synchro Scan] ..............................P184
Image
[Master Pedestal Level] .................P184
[Luminance Level] .........................P221
Audio
[Mic Level Adj.] ..............................P170
[Mic Level Limiter]..........................P170
[Wind Cut]......................................P193
[Wind Noise Canceller] ..................P222
[Lens Noise Cut] ............................P222
Monitoring
HDMI output while recording .........P187
[Sound Output]...............................P195
Screen settings
[Mic Level Disp.] ............................P170
[SS/Gain Operation].......................P185
[Monochrome Live View] ...............P228
[Center Marker]..............................P229
[Zebra Pattern]...............................P230
Advanced recording and settings
[Time Code] ...................................P169
[Time Stamp Rec] ..........................P171
[Color Bars]....................................P172
[System Frequency].......................P240
Basic settings
[Format] ...........................................P31
[Clock Set] .......................................P39
Display switching.............................P49
How to set menu items....................P55
[Q.MENU] ........................................P58
[Beep] ............................................P237
[Economy] .....................................P237
[Double Slot Function] ...................P242
[Reset] (initialisation) ..................... P244
[Sensor Cleaning].......................... P244
Customisation
[CUSTOM] in the Quick Menu .........P59
Function buttons ..............................P60
Custom Mode ..................................P84
[Custom] menu ..............................P223
Motion Picture
Setup/Custom
12
Playback
Picture playback ............................P196
Motion picture playback.................P197
Playback Zoom..............................P199
Multi Playback ...............................P200
Delete ............................................P203
[Auto Review] ................................P228
Playback/display settings
[Slide Show] ..................................P247
[Rotate]..........................................P261
Edit
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] ......... P123
Focus Stacking..............................P131
[RAW Processing]..........................P252
[Light Composition] ........................P255
[Clear Retouch]..............................P256
[Resize]..........................................P259
[Cropping] ......................................P260
Adding information
[Title Edit].......................................P250
[Text Stamp] ..................................P257
Image settings
[Protect] .........................................P249
[Rating] ..........................................P249
[Print Set] .......................................P251
Connect
“Image App” ..................................P267
[Pairing] ........................................ P268
[WPS (Push-Button)] .............P300, 302
Direct connection...........................P302
Image App
[Remote Wakeup]......................... P274
Remote recording..........................P275
Saving images ...............................P277
Sending images.....................P277, 287
[Auto Transfer].............................. P278
Auto Cloud Backup....................... P279
[Location Logging] ........................ P282
[Auto Clock Set] ............................ P283
In combination with other devices
Playing back pictures on a TV .......P284
Printing images ..............................P288
Sending images to an AV
device ............................................P289
Sending images to a PC ................P290
Sending images to a web
service ...........................................P292
Using [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........P295
PC
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” ....................P311
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio”.......P312
Transferring images to a PC .........P290
TV
Playing Back Pictures on a TV
Screen ...........................................P308
[VIERA Link] ..................................P309
Recorder
Dubbing .........................................P315
Printer
PictBridge ......................................P316
Playback
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connections with other devices
13
1. Before Use
Care of the camera
Do not subject to strong vibration, shock, or pressure.
• The lens, monitor, or external case may be damaged if used in the following conditions.
It may also malfunction or image may not be recorded if you:
– Drop or hit the camera.
– Press hard on the lens or the monitor.
∫Splash Proof
Splash Proof is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera offers
against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash Proof does not
guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected to direct contact with
water.
In order to minimise the possibility of damage please be sure the following precautions are
taken:
– The Splash Proof feature works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically designed
to support this feature.
– The camera is not designed to be Dust and Splash proof when the USB connection cable or
the cable holder is attached to it.
– Make sure that all doors, socket caps and terminal covers are securely closed.
– Make sure that you are in a dry and secure place when changing the battery, lens or memory
card. After changing, make sure their protective doors are securely closed.
– If this camera is exposed to water, sand or any other foreign material clean it as soon as
possible, taking the necessary precautions that the foreign substance does not get inside the
camera.
– Under no circumstances should you touch or place any foreign objects within the camera or
in close proximity of the camera’s image sensor.
When using the camera in cold environments with temperatures between s10 oC
and 0 oC (14 oF and 32 oF):
– Attach a Panasonic interchangeable lens with a minimum recommended operating
temperature of s10 oC (14 oF) before use.
If sand, dust, or liquids such as water droplets adhere to the monitor, wipe them off with a
dry soft cloth.
– Not doing so may cause the monitor to respond incorrectly to touch operations.
– If the monitor is closed when such liquids are present, malfunction may result.
If you shake the camera while it is turned off, its sensors may move or a rattling sound
may be heard. The sound is caused by the In-Body Image Stabiliser, and this is not a
malfunction.
1. Before Use
14
∫About Condensation (When the lens, the viewfinder or monitor is fogged up)
• Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes. Be careful of
condensation since it causes lens, viewfinder and monitor stains, fungus and camera
malfunction.
• If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours. The fog will
disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient
temperature.
15
1. Before Use
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera
was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Operating Instructions”.
• Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.
• Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text.
• SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the
text.
• The card is optional.
1. Before Use
16
Names and Functions of Components
∫Camera body
26 2529 2728
9
12
22
30
1615 17
1314
8
11
10
21
20
24 23
19
18
1
4
2 3
19 5 6
7
1WIRELESS connection lamp (P265)
2Status indicator (P39)
3Camera ON/OFF switch (P39)
4[ ] (Exposure Compensation) button (P105)
5[ ](ISO sensitivity) button (P107)
6[ ](White Balance) button (P109)
7Focus distance reference mark (P103)
8[Fn1] button (P60)
9Motion picture button (P162)
10 Front dial (P45)
11 Shutter button (P43)
12 Self-timer indicator (P133)/
AF Assist Lamp (P225)
13 Mode dial (P44)
14 Mode dial lock button (P44)
15
Stereo microphone (P170)
• Be careful not to cover the microphone with
your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult
to record.
16
Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (P153)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of
children to prevent swallowing.
17 Drive mode dial (P112)
18 Flash synchro socket
(Flash synchro socket cap) (P154)
19 Shoulder strap eyelet (P20)
20 [MIC] socket (P192)
21 Headphone socket (P195)
22 [HDMI] socket (P187, 308)
23 USB socket (P313, 316)
24 Cable holder mount (P187)
25 Lens release button (P35)
26 Lens lock pin
27 Mount
28 Sensor
29 Lens fitting mark (P34)
30 Preview button (P76)/Function button (Fn6)
(P60)
17
1. Before Use
• Function buttons ([Fn7] to [Fn11]) (P60)
are touch icons.
Touch the [ ] tab on the recording screen to
display them.
45
47
48
49
51
52
53
31
54
35 36
41
42
37
60 5657
33
32
44
43
50
55
46
34 38 39
40
59 58
31 Touch screen (P52)/monitor (P321)
32 [(] (Playback) button (P196)
33 [LVF] button (P42)/[Fn5] button (P60)
34 Speaker (P237)
35 Eye sensor (P43)
36 Viewfinder (P42)
37 Eye cup (P341)
38 Diopter adjustment dial (P42)
39
Joystick (P48, 98)/Function button (P60)
Centre (Fn12)/3(Fn13)/1(Fn14)/4(Fn15)/
2(Fn16)
40 [Q.MENU] button (P58)/[Fn2] button (P60)
41 Rear dial (P45)
42 [DISP.] button (P49, 51)
43 [AF/AE LOCK] button (P104)
44 Focus mode lever (P86, 101)
45 [REMOTE] socket (P320)
46 [ ] (Auto Focus Mode) button (P86)/
[Fn3] button (P60)
47 Cursor buttons (P48)/Function button (P60)
3(Fn17)/1(Fn18)/4(Fn19)/2(Fn20)
48 Control dial (P47)
49 [MENU/SET] button (P48, 55)
50 Card slot 1 (P28)
51 Access lamp (card 1) (P29)
52 Card slot 2 (P28)
53 Access lamp (card 2) (P29)
54 Card door (P28)
55 [ ] (Delete/Cancel) button (P203)/
[Fn4] button (P60)
56 Battery door (P27)
57 Release lever (P27)
58
DC coupler cover (P320)
• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the
Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and AC
adaptor (optional) are used.
59
Cover for the battery grip connector (P319)
• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector
out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
60
Tripod mount (P344)
• It may not be possible to attach and securely
fasten a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more to the camera. Doing so
may also damage the camera.
1. Before Use
18
∫Lens
H-ES12060 H-FS12060
H-HSA12035
123 6 8
574
23 6 781
1234 687
1Lens surface
2Focus ring (P101)
3Zoom ring (P147)
4O.I.S. switch (P143)
5
[AF/MF] switch
• When either the [AF/MF] switch of the lens or
the setting of the camera is set to [MF],
Manual Focus (MF) is enabled.
6Contact point
7Lens mount rubber (P342)
8Lens fitting mark (P34)
19
1. Before Use
About the Lens
This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with
the Micro Four ThirdsTM System lens mount specification
(Micro Four Thirds mount).
You can also use a lens of any of the following
standards by attaching a mount adaptor.
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as Auto Focus, Image Stabiliser, and
zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
For details on the lens used, refer to the website.
For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the interchangeable lens
to the latest version.
• To view the latest information on the firmware or to download the firmware, visit the
support site below:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• To check the firmware version of the interchangeable lens, attach it to the camera body and
select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup] menu.
Lens Mount adaptor
Four Thirds™ mount specification
lens
Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)
Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)
Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)
About the lens and functions
Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible
lenses.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• The focal length noted on the lens in use is equivalent to double when converted to the 35 mm
film camera.
(It will be equivalent to 100 mm lens when a 50 mm lens is used.)
About the firmware of your interchangeable lens
20
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
• We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from
dropping.
1Pass the shoulder strap through the
shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.
A: Shoulder strap eyelet
2Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the ring in the direction of the
arrow and then pass it through the
stopper.
3Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the hole on the other side of the
stopper.
4Pull the shoulder strap and
then check that it will not
come out.
• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then
attach the other side of the
shoulder strap.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
21
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Charging the Battery
∫About batteries that you can use with this unit
• Use the dedicated charger and battery.
• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.
• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available for purchase in some markets. Some of
these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet
the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that
these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are
not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit
battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a
genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
Charging
1Connect the AC cable.
2Attach the battery paying attention to the
direction of the battery until it clicks.
• The [CHARGE] indicator A lights up and charging begins.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
22
∫ About the [CHARGE] indicator
• When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes
– The battery temperature is too high or too low. It is recommended to charge the battery again
in an ambient temperature of between 10 oC and 30 oC (50 oF and 86 oF).
– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.
∫Charging time
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been
used for a long time may be longer than normal.
∫Battery indication
• The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted.
(The status indicator also blinks.)
Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery.
On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
(Disconnect the charger from the electrical socket and detach the
battery after charging is completed.)
Charging time Approx. 220 min
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully
charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
23
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
By CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) standard
When a Panasonic SDHC memory card and the supplied battery are used
∫Recording still pictures (when using the Monitor)
∫Recording still pictures (when using the Viewfinder)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Power Save LVF
Shooting] (P237) is set to [3SEC] and works as intended. (Based on the test conditions
derived from the CIPA standard and specified by Panasonic)
Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 400 pictures
Recording time Approx. 200 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 410 pictures
Recording time Approx. 205 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 410 pictures
Recording time Approx. 205 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)
Recording time Approx. 200 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 400 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)
Recording time Approx. 200 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 390 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)
Recording time Approx. 195 min
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
24
∫Recording motion pictures (when using the monitor)
[AVCHD] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/17M/60i]/[FHD/17M/50i])
[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/60p]/[FHD/28M/50p])
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
25
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/30p]/[4K/100M/25p])
[MP4 (LPCM)] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/8bit/100M/60p]/[FHD/8bit/
100M/50p])
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 110 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 55 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
26
[MOV] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/8bit/100M/60p]/[FHD/8bit/100M/50p])
• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as
turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
∫Playback (when using the monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Playback time Approx. 240 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Playback time Approx. 260 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is used
Playback time Approx. 270 min
• The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the
environment and the operating conditions.
For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of
recordable pictures is reduced.
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging
the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery.
27
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Check that this unit is turned off.
11: Slide the release lever in the
direction of the arrow (to the OPEN
side).
2: Open the battery door.
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.
• If you use other batteries, we cannot
guarantee the quality of this product.
2Being careful about the battery
orientation, insert all the way until you
hear a locking sound and then check
that it is locked by lever A.
When removing the battery, push the
lever A toward the arrow and pull out
the battery.
31: Close the battery door.
2: Slide the release lever in the
direction of the arrow.
• Confirm that there is no foreign matter adhered on the inner side (rubber seal) of the battery
door.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.)
• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera
also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Before removing the battery, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has gone
off completely.
(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or
the recorded pictures may be lost.)
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
28
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)
• Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1Slide the card door to open it.
2Push it securely all the way until you hear a
“click” while being careful about the
direction in which you insert it.
To remove the card, push the card until it
clicks, then pull the card out upright.
• One card can be inserted into each of the card slot 1
A and the card slot 2 B.
• To insert/remove the card into/from the card slot 1 A,
push the top side of the card. To insert/remove the
card into/from the card slot 2 B, push the bottom side
of the card.
C: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.
31: Close the card door.
2: Slide the card door to the end and then
close it firmly.

29
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Card access indicators
• During access (i.e., while the access lamp is lit up or [ ]/[ ] is displayed), do not turn
this unit off, remove the battery, card or disconnect the AC adaptor (optional).
Furthermore, do not subject the camera to vibration, impact or static electricity.
The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate
normally.
If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation
again.
Access lamp
Lights up while the card is being accessed
(during recording, deletion, formatting, etc.).
Access indication
Lights up red while an image is being recorded
to the card.
• With [Double Slot Function] in the [Setup] menu, you can set the way recording to the two card
slots is performed. (P242)
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
AFS
L
4:3
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
30
Card Information
The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit.
(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)
∫Recording of motion pictures/6K photos/4K photos and speed class ratings
According to the [Rec Format] (P163) and [Rec Quality] (P163) of a motion picture, the
required card differs. To record 6K/4K photos, you need a card with a speed class rating
that supports 6K/4K photo recording. Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD
Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.
• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous writing.
To check the class, see the labelled side, etc. of the card.
• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
SD Memory Card
(512 MB to 2 GB)
• This unit is compatible with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class
3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.
• Operation of the cards on the left has been confirmed with
Panasonic’s cards.
SDHC Memory Card
(4 GB to 32 GB)
SDXC Memory Card
(48 GB to 128 GB)
[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example
[AVCHD] All Class 4 or higher
[MP4] FHD
4K
UHS Speed Class 3
[MP4 (LPCM)] All
[MOV] All
6K/4K Photo
Post Focus function UHS Speed Class 3
• If you set the Write-Protect switch A to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write,
delete or format the data or display it by recording date.
• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves,
static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing
important data on a PC etc.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
31
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary
data in advance.
Select the menu. (P55)
Formatting the card (initialisation)
> [Setup] > [Format] > [Slot 1]/[Slot 2]
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) when formatting. Do
not turn the camera off during formatting.
• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
32
∫Number of recordable pictures
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [A]
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]
∫Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded.
• [AVCHD]
• [MP4]
Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording
time
[Picture Size] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
L (20M) 1450 2910 5810 11510
M (10M) 2630 5280 10510 20810
S (5M) 4600 9220 17640 34940
[Picture Size] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
L (20M) 450 900 1810 3590
M (10M) 520 1050 2110 4180
S (5M) 570 1150 2290 4550
[Rec Quality] System frequency 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[FHD/28M/60p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/17M/60i] 1h55m 4h5m 8h10m 16h20m
[FHD/24M/30p]
[FHD/24M/24p] 1h20m 2h50m 5h45m 11h35m
[FHD/28M/50p] 50.00Hz
(PAL)
1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/17M/50i] 1h55m 4h5m 8h10m 16h20m
[FHD/24M/25p] 1h20m 2h50m 5h45m 11h35m
[Rec Quality] System frequency 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/24p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[FHD/28M/60p] 1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/20M/30p] 1h35m 3h15m 6h35m 13h15m
[FHD/24M/24p] 1h20m 2h50m 5h45m 11h35m
[4K/100M/25p] 50.00Hz
(PAL)
19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[FHD/28M/50p] 1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/20M/25p] 1h35m 3h15m 6h35m 13h15m
[FHD/24M/24p] 24.00Hz
(CINEMA) 1h20m 2h50m 5h45m 11h35m
33
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
• [MP4 (LPCM)], [MOV]
[Rec Quality] System frequency 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[C4K/10bit/150M/24p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[C4K/8bit/100M/24p] 19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[4K/8bit/150M/60p]
[4K/A/150M/60p]
[4K/10bit/150M/30p]
[4K/10bit/150M/24p]
12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/A/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[4K/A/100M/24p]
19m00s 41m00s 1h25m 2h50m
[FHD/8bit/100M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p]
19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[4K/8bit/150M/50p]
[4K/A/150M/50p]
[4K/10bit/150M/25p] 50.00Hz
(PAL)
12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[4K/A/100M/25p] 19m00s 41m00s 1h25m 2h50m
[FHD/8bit/100M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/25p] 19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[C4K/10bit/150M/24p]
24.00Hz
(CINEMA)
12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[C4K/8bit/100M/24p] 19m00s 41m00s 1h25m 2h50m
[4K/10bit/150M/24p] 12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[4K/A/100M/24p] 19m00s 41m00s 1h25m 2h50m
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p] 19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, the number of recordable
pictures and available recording time vary.
• [AVCHD]:
You can continue recording without interruption even if the file size exceeds 4 GB, but the
motion picture file will be divided.
• [MP4] (with a [Rec Quality] size of [FHD]):
You can continue recording without interruption even if the continuous recording time exceeds
30 minutes or the file size exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be divided and
recorded/played back separately.
• [MP4] (with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]), [MP4 (LPCM)] or [MOV]:
Motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate files in the following cases.
(You can continue recording without interruption.)
– When using an SDHC memory card: If the file size exceeds 4 GB
– When using an SDXC memory card: If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and
4 minutes or if the file size exceeds 96 GB
• Before recording, the screen displays the available recording time derived from the
amount of free space on the card; during recording, it displays the remaining time for
continuous recording.
• [9999i] is displayed on the recording screen if there are 10000 or more recordable pictures
remaining.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
34
Attaching/Removing the Lens
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P340 when dirt or dust gets on
the lens.
1Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the
arrow to detach them.
2Align the lens fitting marks C and then rotate the lens in the direction
of the arrow until it clicks.
• Do not press the lens release button D when you attach a lens.
• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens
mount may get scratched.
Attaching the lens
 
35
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
• Attach the lens cap.
While pressing on the lens release button A,
rotate the lens toward the arrow until it stops and
then remove.
• To prevent dust and other particles from accumulating on or entering the camera or lens, be
sure to attach the body cap to the camera and the lens rear cap to the lens after detaching it
from the camera.
When using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/
H-FS12060/H-HSA12035)
Rotate the zoom ring of the lens.
Detaching the lens
Zoom operations
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view
T
W
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
36
When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The
lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the
drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.
To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the interchangeable lenses
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060/H-HSA12035)
Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as
shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be
bent.
1Align the mark A ( ) on the lens hood with the
mark on the tip of the lens.
2Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks and then align the mark B
( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip
of the lens.
∫Removing the lens hood (H-ES12060)
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow
while pushing the button C on the lens hood.
Attaching the Lens Hood
37
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood
Example: H-ES12060
1Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow while pushing the button A on the
lens hood.
2Align the mark B ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
3Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
38
Opening the Monitor
At the time when this camera is purchased, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Bring out the monitor as shown below.
1Open the monitor. (Maximum 180o)
2It can be rotated 180o forward.
3Return the monitor to its original position.
• When rotating the monitor, be careful not to apply too much force. Doing so may cause
damage.
∫Free angle shooting
The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as it allows you to take
pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.
Taking pictures at a high angle Taking pictures at a low angle
• When not using the monitor it is recommended that you close it with the screen facing inward
to prevent dirt and scratches.
39
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)
• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.
1Turn the camera on.
• When the camera is turned on, the status indicator
1 lights up.
• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed
to step 4.
2Press [MENU/SET].
3Press 3/4 to select the language, and press
[MENU/SET].
4Press [MENU/SET].
5Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,
day, hour, minute), and press 3/4 to set.
A: Time at the home area
B: Time at the travel destination
To set the display order and the time display
format.
• To display the setting screen of the order/time, select
[Style] and then press [MENU/SET].
6Press [MENU/SET] to set.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
40
7When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed, press
[MENU/SET].
8When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].
9Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then
press [MENU/SET].
Select [Clock Set] in the [Setup] menu. (P55)
• The clock can be reset as shown in steps 5 and 6 on P39.
• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even
without the battery.
(Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.)
Re-adjusting the clock
• If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the
pictures with [Text Stamp] or order a photo studio to print the pictures.
41
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Basic Operations
Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side
and stand with your feet slightly apart.
• Do not cover the AF Assist lamp A, or microphone B with your fingers or other objects.
• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person or
object in the vicinity while taking pictures.
∫Detects orientation of camera (Direction Detection Function)
This function detects the vertical orientation when you record
with the camera vertically orientated.
When you play back the recording, the recording is
automatically displayed in vertical orientation.
(Only available when [Rotate Disp.] (P263) is set to [ON].)
• When the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record, the Direction
Detection Function may not work correctly.
• Motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot be
displayed vertically.
Tips for taking good pictures

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
42
Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that you can see
the characters displayed in the viewfinder clearly.
Press [LVF] to switch between the Monitor and Viewfinder.
A[LVF] button
BEye sensor
• You can also use the button as a function button. (P60)
Press [LVF].
¢If [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is set to [ON], the
camera automatically adjusts the focus as the eye sensor is activated. The camera does not
beep when focus is achieved with [Eye Sensor AF].
Using the Viewfinder
Diopter adjustment
Switching the Monitor/Viewfinder
Automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching¢Viewfinder display¢Monitor display
ョㄏブ
43
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫Notes on automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching enables the eye sensor to switch the display to the
viewfinder automatically when you bring your eye or an object near it.
• If you enable the automatic viewfinder/monitor switching function and display the On-monitor
recording information screen (P50) on the monitor, [Power Save LVF Shooting] in [Economy]
(P237) can be used, allowing you to reduce the battery consumption.
• Eye sensor might not work properly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you
hold the camera, or bright light shining around the eyepiece. In that case, press [LVF] to switch
the display.
• During motion picture playback or a slide show, the camera does not automatically switch the
display to the Viewfinder with the eye sensor.
• The eye sensor does not work depending on the angle of the monitor.
The shutter button works in two steps. To take a picture, press it.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
AAperture value
BShutter speed
CFocus indication
• Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed.
(It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved, except
when set to flash.)
• Once the subject is in focus, the focus indication is displayed.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication flashes.)
Press the shutter button fully (push it in further),
and take the picture.
Shutter button (Taking pictures)
• Pictures cannot be taken until focus is achieved when [Focus/Release Priority] (P226)
is set to [FOCUS].
• Even during menu operation or image playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you
can instantly set the camera ready for recording.
60
60
602.8
2.8
2.8
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
44
Start recording by pressing the motion picture
button.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture
button again.
Press the mode dial lock button 1 to
release the lock.
• The dial is locked if the mode dial lock button is
depressed. Each press locks/unlocks the dial.
Rotate the mode dial 2 and adjust the
recording mode.
Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)
Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode)
Intelligent Auto Mode (P65)
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (P66)
Programme AE Mode (P70)
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P73)
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P73)
Manual Exposure Mode (P74)
Creative Video Mode (P173)
Custom Mode (P84)
Creative Control Mode (P78)
45
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Rotating:
Selection of items or setting of values is performed during the various settings.
• These operating instructions describe operations of the front dial/rear dial as follows:
Allows you to set the aperture, shutter speed, and other settings when in ///
modes.
• In [Dial Set.] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can change the operation methods of the
front dial and rear dial. (P47)
Front Dial/Rear Dial
e.g.: When rotating the front dial to the left
or right
e.g.: When rotating the rear dial to the left
or right
Mode dial Front dial Rear Dial
(P70) Programme Shift Programme Shift
(P73) Aperture value Aperture value
(P73) Shutter speed Shutter speed
(P74) Aperture value Shutter speed
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
46
Temporarily changing the items assigned to the front/rear dials ([Dial Operation
Switch])
You can temporarily change the items assigned to the front/
rear dials using the function button to which [Dial Operation
Switch] is assigned.
[Dial Operation Switch] is assigned to [Fn1] at the time of
purchase. (P60)
• You can set the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/
rear dials in [Dial Operation Switch Setup] in [Dial Set.] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(P47)
1Press [Fn1].
• A guide will be displayed showing the items temporarily
assigned to the front/rear dials.
• If no operations are performed, the guide will disappear in
a few seconds.
2Rotate the front/rear dials while the guide is
displayed.
• The settings of the items assigned to the dials will change.
3Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• You can also complete this step by performing either of the operations below:
– Press the shutter button halfway
– Press [Fn1]
• Items that are temporarily assigned to the front/rear dials can be used only while the guide
(step 1) or setting screen (step 2) is displayed.
ョㄏヒ
989898
0
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
ISOISOISOISO
47
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫Setting the operation methods of the front dial and rear dial
Rotating the control dial:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
• The operation of rotating the control dial is illustrated as below in
these operating instructions.
Example: When rotating the control dial to the left or right:
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed
in Manual Exposure Mode.
[F SS]:
Assigns the aperture value to the front dial, and the shutter
speed to the rear dial.
[SS F]:
Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and the aperture
value to the rear dial.
[Rotation (F/SS)]
Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the
aperture value and shutter speed.
[]/[]
[Exposure Comp.]
Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear
dial so that you can directly adjust it.
[] (Front Dial)/[ ] (Rear Dial)/[OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials
when you press the function button to which [Dial Operation
Switch] is assigned.
[] ([Front Dial Operation])/[ ] ([Rear Dial Operation])
• Items that can be set are as follows.
– [Photo Style] (P208)
– [Filter Effect] (P78, 210)
–[Aspect Ratio] (P205)
– [AF Mode] (P91)
– [6K/4K PHOTO] (P116)
– [Highlight Shadow] (P212)
– [i.Dynamic] (P213)
– [i.Resolution] (P213)
– [Flash Mode] (P156)
– [Flash Adjust.] (P158)
– [Sensitivity] (P107)
– [White Balance] (P109)
• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.
Control Dial
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
48
Pressing the cursor button:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
Pressing [MENU/SET]:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.
• These operating instructions expresses the up, down, left, and
right of the cursor button as 3/4/2/1.
∫Changing the function to be used while the recording screen is displayed
Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button
Joystick
The joystick can be operated in two ways: it can be
moved up, down, left or right, or it can be pressed.
The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor
buttons/[MENU/SET] button.
Moving:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is
performed.
Pressing:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is
performed.
• In these operating instructions, the up, down, left and
right of the joystick are expressed as 3/4/2/1.
Moving Pressing
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Joystick Setting]
[D.FOCUS Movement] Allows you to move the display positions of the AFarea and MF
Assist. (P98, 101)
[Fn] Uses a function assigned in [Fn Button Set]. (P60)
[MENU]
Displays the menu when the joystick is pressed.
• Operations that can be performed by moving the joystick are
disabled.
[OFF] Disables the joystick.
MENU
49
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Press [DISP.] to switch the information displayed on the
screen.
Switching the display method of the viewfinder/monitor
∫[ ] Live View Finder style display layout (Example of viewfinder style display)
[DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)
In Recording Mode
>[Custom] > [Monitor / Display] > [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] >
[LVF Disp. Set]/[Monitor Disp. Set]
[] (viewfinder style) Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the
composition of the images.
[] (monitor style) Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their
details.
With information
(detailed
information)
With information
With information
(detailed
information, tilt
sensor display)
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
ュリヴヱハ
MENU
99
0
AFS
AFS
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
L
4:3
99
0
99
0
AFS
AFS
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
L
4:3
99
0
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
50
∫[ ] Monitor style display layout (Example of monitor style display)
¢When the on-monitor recording information screen is displayed, you can touch the desired
item and change its setting directly.
∫About the tilt sensor display
With the tilt sensor displayed, it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc.
• When the tilt of the camera is little, the indicator changes to green.
With information Without
information
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
Without
information (tilt
sensor display)
Turned off
On-monitor
recording
information¢
• If you assign [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style] to [Fn Button Set] (P60) in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu, each time you press the assigned function button, you can change the display style of
the monitor or viewfinder ([ ]/[ ]), whichever is currently in use.
AHorizontal direction: Correcting tilt to the left
BVertical direction: Correcting downward tilt
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approximately n1°.
• When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record, the tilt sensor display may not be
displayed correctly, and the Direction Detection Function (P41) may not work correctly.
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
98
98
AWB
00
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS

51
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
¢1 Press 3/4 to switch between the following display modes:
– Detailed information display
– Histogram display
– Photo style, Highlight shadow display
– White balance display
– Lens information display
¢2 This is displayed if [Highlight] (P229) in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to
[ON].
• Some of the screens cannot be displayed for certain files that you play back, such as motion
pictures and 6K/4K burst files.
In Playback Mode
With information
Detailed
information
display¢1
Without
information
(Highlight
display)¢2
Without
information
60F3.5
0
AWBAWB
1/98981/98
2
00
L
4:3
sRGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
AWB
STD.
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
52
Touch screen of this unit is capacitive. Touch the panel directly with your bare finger.
∫Touch
To touch and release the touch screen.
∫Drag
A movement without releasing the touch screen.
∫Pinch (enlarge/reduce)
Pinch the touch screen apart (enlarge) or together
(reduce) with two fingers.
Touch screen (Touch operations)
• Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.
• If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions
that accompany the sheet.
(Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)
Not available in these cases:
• The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.
– When touched by a gloved hand
– When the touch screen is wet
Fn11Fn11Fn11
Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn7Fn7Fn7
Fn9Fn9Fn9
Fn10Fn10Fn10
OFFOFFOFF
OFFOFFOFF
AABBB
2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X
53
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Applicable modes:
Just by touching the subject you want as your point of focus, the camera will focus on the
subject and take the picture automatically.
∫To cancel the Touch Shutter function
Touch [ ].
Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function
Taking pictures using the Touch Shutter function
1Touch [ ].
2Touch [ ].
• Icon will change to [ ], and taking a picture with the
Touch Shutter function becomes possible.
3Touch the subject you wish to focus on, and
then take a picture.
• The picture is taken when the focus is achieved.
• If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.
××
×
×
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
54
Applicable modes:
You can easily optimise the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the subject
appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.
∫Cancelling the Touch AE function
Touch [ ].
• [Metering Mode] returns to the original setting, and the brightness optimisation position is
cancelled.
Easily Optimising the Brightness for a Specified Area (Touch AE)
1Touch [ ].
2Touch [ ].
• The setting screen for the brightness optimisation
position is displayed.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used
exclusively for the Touch AE.
3Touch the subject you want to optimise the
brightness for.
• Touching [Reset] will bring the brightness optimisation
position back to the centre.
4Touch [Set].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu has been set to
[AF+AE] (P100)
AE
AE
×
×
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
55
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Setting menu items
You can either operate the buttons or touch the monitor to set menu items.
1Press [MENU/SET].
• The [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power.
Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.
/[Intelligent Auto] (P68)
These menus let you set the functions available only for
their corresponding Recording Modes.
These menus are displayed only for their corresponding
Recording Modes.
[Creative Video] (P182)
[Custom Mode] (P85)
[Creative Control] (P78)
[Rec] (P205) This menu lets you set picture settings.
[Motion Picture] (P221) This menu lets you set motion picture settings.
[Custom] (P223)
Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen
and button operations, can be set up according to your
preferences.
[Setup] (P235)
This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select the
operating beep tone settings and set other settings which
make it easier for you to operate the camera.
You can also configure the settings of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
related functions.
[My Menu] (P245) This menu lets you register frequently-used menus.
[Playback] (P246) This menu lets you set the playback and editing settings
for images.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
56
Touch the menu item.
• You can switch the page by touching the bar (A) on the right side of the screen.
Touch the Setting to set.
2Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the menu item and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also select the menu item by rotating the
control dial.
• You can also move to the next screen by rotating the
rear dial.
Touch operation
To display explanations of the menu items.
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting is
selected, a description of the menu is displayed.
3Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the setting and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also select the setting by rotating the control
dial.
• Depending on the menu item, its setting may not
appear or it may be displayed in a different way.
Touch operation
• Menu items that are not available are displayed in grey. When
a grey item is selected, if you press [MENU/SET], a message
indicating that the item cannot be set is displayed along with
the reason why it cannot be set under certain conditions.
57
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Touch a menu selector icon, such as [ ].
Touch [ ].
∫Switching to other menus
1Press 2.
2Press 3/4 to select a menu selector icon, such as
[].
• You can also select the menu toggle icons by rotating
the front dial.
3Press [MENU/SET].
Touch operation
∫Close the menu
Press [ ] or press the shutter button halfway.
Touch operation
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
58
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick
Menu)
By using the Quick Menu, some of the menu settings can be easily found.
• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display
style the camera is in.
1Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.
• You can also use the button as a function button. (P60)
2Rotate the front dial to select the menu item.
• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control
dial.
3Rotate the rear dial to select the setting.
4Press [Q.MENU] to exit the menu once the
setting is complete.
• You can also set items by pressing the cursor buttons 3/4/2/1.
On-monitor recording information in [ ] (Monitor
style) (P49)
Select the item by pressing the [Q.MENU] button and
rotating the front dial, and then select the setting by rotating
the rear dial.
• You can also set with 3/4/2/1 and [MENU/SET].
ョㄏビ
AFSAFS
AU
TO
603.5
AWB
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
L
4:3
0
AFSAFS
AU
TO
603.5
AWB
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
L
4:3
0
98
98
AWB
00
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFSAFS
59
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
When [Q.MENU] (P227) in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu is set to [CUSTOM], the Quick
Menu can be changed as desired.
Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.
1Press 4 to select [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4/2/1 to select the menu item in the top
row and then press [MENU/SET].
3Press 2/1 to select the empty space in the bottom
row and then press [MENU/SET].
AItems that can be set
BSet items
• You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top
row to the bottom row.
• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can
replace an existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item.
• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing 4 and select an item to cancel,
and then press [MENU/SET].
4Press [ ].
• It will return to screen of step 1.
Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.
Customising the Quick Menu settings
L
4:3
AFS
1
2
345
L
4:3
AFS
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
60
Assigning frequently used functions to the
buttons (function buttons)
You can assign recording functions, etc. to specific buttons and icons.
• Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the function button.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 3/4 to select the function button you want to
assign a function to and then press [MENU/SET].
• To select a button from [Fn12] to [Fn20] in [Setting in REC
mode], press [DISP.] to switch the screen.
3Press 3/4 to select the function you want to assign
and then press [MENU/SET].
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in REC mode], refer to P61.
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode], refer to P63.
• To restore the default function button settings, select [Restore to Default].
∫Configuring the function button settings from the on-monitor recording
information screen
Touching [Fn] on the on-monitor recording information screen (P49) also allows you to
display the screen in step 2.
∫Rapidly assigning functions
The button assignment screen displayed in step 3 above can be displayed by pressing
and holding a function button (any of [Fn1] to [Fn6] or [Fn12] to [Fn20]) for 2 seconds.
• In some cases the function assignment screen cannot be displayed depending on the mode or
display screen.
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Fn Button Set]>
[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in PLAY mode]
MENU
61
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can use assigned functions by pressing a function button when recording.
∫Using function buttons with touch operations
1Touch [ ].
2Touch [Fn7], [Fn8], [Fn9], [Fn10] or [Fn11].
∫Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]
Using the function buttons during recording
[Rec] menu
–[Wi-Fi] (P265): [Fn7]¢
– [Q.MENU] (P58): [Fn2]¢
– [LVF/Monitor Switch] (P42): [Fn5]¢
– [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style] (P50)
– [AF/AE LOCK] (P104)
–[AF-ON] (P103, 104)
– [Preview] (P76): [Fn6]¢
– [One Push AE] (P77)
– [Touch AE] (P54)
– [Level Gauge] (P50): [Fn4]¢
– [Focus Area Set] (P62)
– [Zoom Control] (P147)
– [1 Shot RAW+JPG] (P62)
– [1 Shot Spot Metering] (P62)
– [Operation Lock] (P227)
– [Dial Operation Switch] (P46): [Fn1]¢
– [Photo Style] (P208)
– [Filter Effect] (P78, 210)
–[Aspect Ratio] (P205)
– [Picture Size] (P206)
– [Quality] (P207)
– [AFS/AFF] (P88)
– [Metering Mode] (P212)
–[Burst Rate] (P113)
– [6K/4K PHOTO] (P116): [Fn9]¢
– [Self Timer] (P133)
– [Bracket] (P139)
– [Highlight Shadow] (P212)
– [i.Dynamic] (P213)
– [i.Resolution] (P213)
– [Post Focus] (P128)
– [HDR] (P219)
– [Shutter Type] (P217)
– [Flash Mode] (P156)
– [Flash Adjust.] (P158)
– [Wireless Flash Setup] (P160)
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
(still pictures/motion pictures) (P148)
– [Digital Zoom] (P150)
– [Stabilizer] (P143)
– [Silent Mode] (P216)
[Motion Picture] menu
– [4K Live Cropping] (P179)
– [Motion Pic. Rec Format] (P163)
– [Motion Pic. Rec Quality] (P163)
– [Variable Frame Rate] (P176)
– [Picture Mode in Rec.] (P168)
– [Synchro Scan] (P184)
– [Time Code Display] (P169)
– [Mic. Directivity Adjust] (P192)
– [Color Bars] (P172)
– [WFM/Vector Scope] (P185)
– [LUT Monitor Display] (P186)
– [LUT HDMI Display] (P191)
– [Focus Transition] (P178)
Fn11Fn11Fn11
Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn7Fn7Fn7
Fn9Fn9Fn9
Fn10Fn10Fn10
OFFOFFOFF
OFFOFFOFF
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
62
¢Function button settings at the time of purchase.
• By default, [Off] is assigned to the buttons [Fn10] to [Fn20].
[Custom] menu
– [Peaking] (P228)
– [Histogram] (P229): [Fn8]¢
– [Guide Line] (P229)
– [Zebra Pattern] (P230)
– [Monochrome Live View] (P228)
– [Rec Area] (P231)
– [Video-Priority Display] (P231)
– [Step Zoom] (P151)
– [Zoom Speed] (P151)
Recording functions
– [ON]/[OFF] of each item in [White Balance]
(P109)
– [ON]/[OFF] of each item in [Photo Style]
(P208)
– [AF Mode/MF] (P91, 101): [Fn3]¢
– [Rec / Playback Switch] (P62)
–[Off]
– [Restore to Default]
• When set to [Focus Area Set], it is possible to display the position setting screen of either AF
area or MF Assist.
• When [1 Shot RAW+JPG] is set, it will record the RAW file and a fine JPEG image
simultaneously once only. It will return to original quality after recording.
• When [1 Shot Spot Metering] is set, it will record with [Metering Mode] set to [ ] (spot) once
only. It will return to original Metering Mode after recording.
• If you assign [Rec / Playback Switch], you can switch between recording and playback
modes.
Not available in these cases:
• [Fn1] cannot be used in the following cases.
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
• [Fn2] cannot be used in the following cases.
– When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
• [Fn4] cannot be used in the following cases.
– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
– Creative Control Mode
– When using [Multi Exp.]
• [Fn20] cannot be used in the following cases.
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
• [Fn7], [Fn8], [Fn9], [Fn10], and [Fn11] cannot be used when the viewfinder is in use.
63
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function
button during playback.
Example: When [Fn2] is set to [Rating¿3]
1Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2Press [Fn2], and then set the image as [Rating¿3].
∫Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]
• The following functions can be assigned to the button [Fn1], [Fn2], [Fn3], [Fn5] or [Fn6].
¢Function button settings at the time of purchase.
Using the function buttons during playback
[Playback] Menu/Playback functions
–[Wi-Fi] (P265): [Fn1]¢
– [LVF/Monitor Switch] (P42): [Fn5]¢
– [Rec / Playback Switch] (P62)
– [Slot Change] (P63): [Fn3]¢
– [6K/4K Photo Play] (P123)
– [Delete Single] (P203)
– [Protect] (P249)
–[Rating¿1] (P249)
–[Rating¿2] (P249)
–[Rating¿3] (P249): [Fn2]¢
–[Rating¿4] (P249)
–[Rating¿5] (P249)
– [Print Set] (P251)
–[Copy] (P258)
– [Off]: [Fn6]¢
– [Restore to Default]
• If you assign [Slot Change], a screen will be displayed, allowing you to switch the card slot for
playback.
3
3
31/981/98
1/98
1/98
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
64
Entering Text
1Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then
press [MENU/SET] to register.
• Move the cursor to [ ] and then press [MENU/SET] to
switch text between [A] (capitals), [a] (lower case), [1]
(numbers) and [&] (special characters).
• To enter the same character again, rotate the control dial
right to move the cursor.
• The following operations can be performed by moving the cursor to the item and
pressing [MENU/SET]:
–[]]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
(Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ].
(Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
2Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [Set] and then press [MENU/
SET] to end text input.
65
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function
(Intelligent Auto Mode)
Recording Mode:
In this mode, the camera makes the optimal settings for the subject and scene.
1Set the mode dial to [¦].
• The camera will switch to either the most recently used
of Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto Mode.
At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent
Auto Plus Mode.
2Align the screen with the subject.
• When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon
of the scene concerned is displayed in blue for
2 seconds, after which its colour changes to the usual
red. (Automatic scene detection)
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
3. Recording Modes
66
The camera detects scenes automatically (Scene Detection)
( : When taking pictures, : When recording motion pictures)
∫Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 3/4 to select [ ] or [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]¢1[i-Night Scenery]
[iHandheld Night
Shot]¢2[i-Food] [i-Baby]¢3[i-Sunset] [i-Low Light]
¢1 Displayed when an external flash is used.
¢2 Only displayed when [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]. (P68)
¢3 When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for
birthdays of registered faces already set only when the Face/Eye of
a person younger than 3 years old is detected.
•[¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard
settings are set.
• When recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function, Scene Detection works in the same way as when motion
picture is recorded.
¦
The Backlight Compensation
• When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically
attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.
> [Intelligent Auto] > [Intelligent Auto Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
67
3. Recording Modes
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode allows you to adjust some settings such as the brightness,
colour tone and defocus control while also using Intelligent Auto Mode for other settings.
∫Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition
The Auto Focus Mode is automatically set to [š]. If you touch the subject, the AF tracking
function will work. The AF tracking function will also work if you press [ ] and then press
the shutter button halfway.
• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered
face is detected, [R] is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].
∫About the flash
When recording with the flash, the camera automatically selects [ ], [ ] (AUTO/
Red-Eye Reduction), [ ] or [ ] according to the type and brightness of the subject.
∫Scene Detection
• If a tripod is used, for instance, and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when
the scene detection has been identified as [ ], the shutter speed will be slower than normal.
Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures.
• Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be selected for the same
subject.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode
Setting the brightness ±—
Setting the colour tone ±—
Defocus Control ±—
Menus that can be set Many Few
• For information on the external flash, refer to P153.
• When [ ] or [ ] is set, Red-Eye Removal is enabled.
• Shutter speed will be slower during [ ] or [ ].
3. Recording Modes
68
Set the functions available only for Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode.
Select the menu. (P55)
When [ ] is detected while taking handheld night shots, pictures of the night scenery will
be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture.
This mode is useful if you want to take stunning night shots with minimal jitter and noise,
without using a tripod.
When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,
multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a
single still picture rich in gradation.
[iHDR] works automatically as needed. When it does, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
[Intelligent Auto] menu
> [Intelligent Auto]
Taking handheld shots of night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHandheld Night Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHDR] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
Not available in these cases:
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] do not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture
recording.
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] are not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post
Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with the Bracket
function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when
[Auto Shooting] is set)
• [iHDR] is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
MENU
MENU
MENU
69
3. Recording Modes
Recording Mode:
∫Setting brightness
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness.
• You can adjust the Exposure Bracket setting by pressing
3/4 while the brightness setting screen is displayed.
(P140)
• Press [ ] again to return to the recording screen.
∫Setting colour
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to adjust colour.
• Press [ ] again to return to the recording screen.
• The colour setting will return to the default level (centre
point) when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched
to another Recording Mode.
∫Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)
1Press [Fn4] to display the setting screen.
2Set the blurriness by rotating the rear dial.
• If you press [MENU/SET], you can return to the recording
screen.
• Pressing [Fn4] on the blurriness setting screen will cancel
the setting.
• Auto Focus Mode is set to [Ø].
The position of the AF area can be set by touching the
screen. (Its size cannot be changed)
Change the settings by using the touch screen
1Touch [ ].
2Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Colour tone
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3Drag the slide bar to set.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
Taking pictures with customised colour, defocus control, and
brightness settings
• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens when the Defocus Control is
used, but this is due to operation of the aperture of the lens and it is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded
during the recording of a motion picture when the function is used.
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
OFF
OFF
A
AB
B
B
SS
SS
SS
F
F
500 250 125 60 30
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
3. Recording Modes
70
Taking Pictures with Automatically Adjusted
Aperture and Shutter Speed (Programme AE
Mode)
Recording Mode:
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the
brightness of the subject.
You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [Rec]
menu.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Press the shutter button halfway and display
the aperture value and shutter speed value
on the screen.
AAperture value
BShutter speed
• If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture
value and shutter speed turn red and blink.
0
98
98
98
60
60
2.8
2.8
71
3. Recording Modes
In Programme AE Mode, you can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed
without changing the exposure. This is called Programme Shift.
You can make the background more blurred by decreasing the aperture value or record a
moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when taking a picture in
Programme AE Mode.
1Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter
speed value on the screen.
2While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds),
perform Programme Shift by rotating the rear dial or
front dial.
AProgramme Shift indication
• To cancel Programme Shift, turn off this unit or rotate the
front/rear dial until the Programme Shift indication disappears.
Programme Shift can easily be cancelled by setting a function button to [One Push AE].
(P77)
Programme Shift
Not available in these cases:
• Programme Shift is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]
2
00
0
60
60
4.0
4.0
98
98
98
SS
SS
SS
F
F
250 125 60 30 15
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
3. Recording Modes
72
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/
Shutter Speed
Recording Mode:
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording
screen. To check on the recording screen, please use [Preview]. (P76)
• The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the
playback screen.
• Rotate the front/rear dial to display the Exposure Meter. Unsuitable areas of the range are
displayed in red.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(Example: In Manual
Exposure Mode)
AExposure meter
BAperture value
CShutter speed
Aperture
value
Small
It becomes easier to
defocus the
background.
Large
It becomes easier to
maintain focus as far as
the background.
Shutter
speed
Slow
It becomes easier to
express movement.
Fast
It becomes easier to
freeze movement.
00
+3
30
305.6
SS
SS
SS
F
F
8 15 30 60 125
5.64.02.8 8.0 11
73
3. Recording Modes
When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimises the shutter speed
for the brightness of the subject.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Set the aperture value by rotating the rear
dial or the front dial.
AAperture value
BExposure meter
When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimises the aperture value
for the brightness of the subject.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial
or the front dial.
AShutter speed
BExposure meter
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to
activate the front/rear dial settings. At positions other than [A], the ring setting takes priority.
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/250th of a
second. (P157)
8.0
8.0
8.0
SS
SS
SS
F
F
60 30 15 8 4
8.05.64.0 11 16
250
250
SS
SS
SS
F
F
60 125 250 500 1000
2.84.05.6
3. Recording Modes
74
Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed,
and rotate the front dial to set the aperture
value.
AExposure meter
BAperture value
CShutter speed
DManual Exposure Assistance
Optimising the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture value
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically so that the exposure will be appropriate for the shutter speed and aperture
value.
• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO
sensitivity may become higher.
Manual Exposure Assistance
• The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures
on the playback screen.
Manual Exposure Mode
Available Shutter Speed (Sec.)
[B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/8000th (with the mechanical shutter)
[B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/2000th (with the electronic front curtain)
1 to 1/16000th (with the electronic shutter)
The exposure is adequate.
Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.
Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.
• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the aperture ring setting takes priority.
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/250th of a
second. (P157)
00
+3
30
305.6
SS
SS
SS
F
F
8 15 30 60 125
5.64.02.8 8.0 11
000
75
3. Recording Modes
∫About [B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is
pressed fully (up to approximately 30 minutes).
The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of
fireworks, a night scene etc.
• It can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode.
• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional)
when you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B].
Refer to P320 for information about the shutter remote control.
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To
avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [Long Shtr NR] in the [Rec] menu to [ON]
before taking pictures. (P215)
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
– When using the electronic shutter
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
3. Recording Modes
76
Applicable modes:
The effects of aperture and shutter speed can be checked by using the Preview Mode.
•Confirm the effects of aperture: You can check the depth of field (effective focus range)
before taking a picture by closing the diaphragm blades to the aperture value you set.
•Confirm the effects of shutter speed: Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual
picture that will be taken with that shutter speed.
Switch to confirmation screen by pressing the preview
button.
• You can also use the button as a function button. (P60)
Depth of field properties
¢1 Recording conditions
¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.
¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background
etc.
Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode)
Normal recording screen
Aperture effect preview
screen
Aperture effect: ±
Shutter speed effect: —
Shutter speed effect
preview screen
Aperture effect: ±
Shutter speed effect: ±
¢1
Aperture value Small Large
Focus length of the lens Tele Wide
Distance to the subject Near Distant
Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)¢2 Deep (Wide)¢3
• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000th of a second.
Not available in these cases:
• Preview Mode is not available when recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
6KWU6SHHG(IIHFWDGGHG
Fn6
3UHYLHZFRPSOHWHG
Fn6
77
3. Recording Modes
Applicable modes:
When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve a
suitable exposure setting.
1Set a function button to [One Push AE]. (P60)
2(When exposure is not adequate)
Press function button.
• The exposure meter is displayed, and the aperture and shutter speed are changed to give
a suitable exposure.
• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.
– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure
by changing the aperture value or shutter speed
– When recording using the flash
– In Preview Mode (P76)
– When using a lens that includes an aperture ring
Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE)
How to tell if the exposure is not adequate
• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
• If the Manual Exposure Assistance (P74) is anything other than when in Manual
Exposure mode.
Blink red The exposure is changed to give a
suitable exposure.
00
-
3
-
3
2
00
8000800080003.53.53.5
989898
98
98
98
2
00
0
60
602.8
SS
SS
SS
F
F
15 30 60 125 250
2.8 4.0 5.6
3. Recording Modes
78
Taking Pictures with different image effects
(Creative Control Mode)
Recording Mode:
This mode records with additional image effects.
You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the
screen.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Press 3/4 to select the image effects
(filters).
APreview display
• You can also select the image effects (filters) by touching
the example images.
3Press [MENU/SET].
∫[Creative Control] menu
Set the functions available only for Creative Control Mode.
Select the menu. (P55)
• It is also possible to display the
selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording
screen.
• White Balance will be fixed to [AWB], and [Sensitivity] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• Depending on the image effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
> [Creative Control]
[Filter Effect] Displays the image effect (filter) selection screen.
[Simultaneous
record w/o filter]
Allows you to set the camera to take a picture with and without an image
effect simultaneously. (P211)
1/8
EXPS
EXPS
MENU
79
3. Recording Modes
Displaying the description of each image effect
Press [DISP.] while the image effect selection screen is displayed.
• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.
Types of image effects
Normal display Guide display List display
[Expressive] [Retro] [Old Days]
[High Key] [Low Key] [Sepia]
[Monochrome] [Dynamic
Monochrome]
[Rough
Monochrome]
[Silky
Monochrome]
[Impressive Art] [High Dynamic]
[Cross Process] [Toy Effect] [Toy Pop]
[Bleach Bypass] [Miniature Effect] [Soft Focus]
[Fantasy] [Star Filter] [One Point Color]
[Sunshine]
1/8
1/8
3. Recording Modes
80
∫Setting the type of defocus ([Miniature Effect])
1Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2Press 3/4 or 2/1 to move the in-focus portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the
screen on the recording screen.
• Touching [ ] allows you to set the recording orientation
(defocus orientation).
3Rotate the rear dial to change the size of in-focus
portion.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/
pinching in (P52) the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the in-focus portion setting back to the default setting.
4Press [MENU/SET] to set.
∫Set the colour to leave in ([One Point Color])
1Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2Select the colour you want to leave by moving the
frame with 3/4/2/1.
• You can also select the colour you want to leave by
touching the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the frame back to the centre.
3Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• No sound is recorded in motion pictures.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)], the length of a recorded motion picture
will be approximately 1/10 shorter than the actual length of time, and the displayed available
recording time will be approximately 10 times longer than usual.
When [System Frequency] is set to [50.00Hz (PAL)] or [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], the length of a
recorded motion picture will be approximately 1/8 shorter than the actual length of time, and
the displayed available recording time will be approximately 8 times longer than usual.
• If you end motion picture recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for a
certain period.
• Depending on the subject, the set colour may not be left in.
81
3. Recording Modes
∫Setting the position and size of the light source ([Sunshine])
1Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2Press 3/4/2/1 to move the centre position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
3Adjust the size of the light source by rotating the rear dial.
• The display can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the light source setting back to the default setting.
4Press [MENU/SET] to set.
The strength and colours of the effects can be easily adjusted to fit your preferences.
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to set.
• Press [ ] again to return to the recording screen.
Point for when placing the centre of the light
source
A more natural appearance can be created by
placing the centre of the light source outside the
image.
Adjust the effect to fit your preferences
Image effect Items that can be set
[Expressive] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours
[Retro] Colour Yellowish tinge Reddish tinge
[Old Days] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[High Key] Colour Pinkish tinge Aquamarinish tinge
[Low Key] Colour Reddish tinge Bluish tinge
[Sepia] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
3. Recording Modes
82
Image effect Items that can be set
[Monochrome] Colour Yellowish tinge Bluish tinge
[Dynamic
Monochrome] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Rough
Monochrome] Grittiness Less gritty Grittier
[Silky
Monochrome] Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Impressive Art] Freshness Black and white Pop colours
[High Dynamic] Freshness Black and white Pop colours
[Cross Process] Colour Greenish tinge/Bluish tinge/Yellowish tinge/
Reddish tinge
[Toy Effect] Colour Orangish tinge Bluish tinge
[Toy Pop] Area with reduced
peripheral brightness Small Large
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Miniature Effect] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours
[Soft Focus] Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Fantasy] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours
[Star Filter]
Length of the rays of light
Short Long
Number of the rays of light
Smaller Larger
Angle of the rays of light
Rotate to the left Rotate to the right
[One Point Color] Amount of colour left Small amount of
colour
Large amount of
colour
[Sunshine] Colour Yellowish tinge/Reddish tinge/Bluish tinge/Whitish
tinge
83
3. Recording Modes
1Press [Fn4] to display the setting screen.
2Rotate the rear dial to set.
• If you press [MENU/SET], you can return to the recording
screen.
• Pressing [Fn4] on the blurriness setting screen will cancel
the setting.
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to set.
• You can adjust the Exposure Bracket setting by pressing
3/4 while the brightness setting screen is displayed.
(P140)
• Press [ ] again to return to the recording screen.
∫Change the settings by using the touch screen
1Touch [ ].
2Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Adjusts an image effect
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3Drag the slide bar to set.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
Setting brightness
SS
SS
SS
F
F
500 250 125 60 30
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
OFF
OFF
EXPS
EXPS
3. Recording Modes
84
Registering your preferred settings (Custom
Mode)
Recording Mode:
Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. ( ,
, , , )
• Initial setting of the Programme AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.
Preparations:
Set in advance the Recording Mode you wish to save and select the desired menu
settings on the camera.
Select the menu. (P55)
• You can register up to three custom sets to of the mode dial.
• The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.
Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings)
> [Setup] > [Cust.Set Mem.] >
Custom set where you want to register settings
[Custom] menu [Setup] menu
– [Menu Guide]
– Data registered with [Face Recog.]
– The [Profile Setup] setting
– All menus
[Playback] menu
– [Rotate Disp.]
– [Picture Sort]
– [Delete Confirmation]
MENU
85
3. Recording Modes
You can easily call up the settings you have registered using [Cust.Set Mem.].
Set the mode dial to [ ], [ ] or [ ].
• The corresponding custom set will be called up. If you set the mode dial to [ ], the last used
custom set will be called up.
∫To change a custom set in [ ] ([Custom Mode] menu)
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select the menu. (P55)
3Press 3/4 to select the custom setting you want to use, and then press [MENU/
SET].
• Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen.
∫Changing the registered content
Registered contents do not change when the menu setting is changed temporarily with the
mode dial set to , or . To change the registered settings, overwrite the
registered content using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Setup] menu.
Recording using registered custom set
> [Custom Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
C3-1C3-1C3-1
C3-1C3-1C3-1
86
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and
Colour tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Automatically
By setting the optimum Focus Mode or Auto Focus Mode for the subject or recording
condition, you can let the camera automatically adjust focus in various scenes.
1Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or
[AFC].
• The Focus Mode will be set. (P88)
2Press [ ].
3Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The Auto Focus Mode will be set. (P91)
4Press the shutter button halfway.
• Auto Focus will be activated.
• The focus indication is displayed as [ ] in a dark environment, and focusing may take
longer than usual.
• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be
activated. When focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF areas in focus are
displayed. (Detection with Starlight AF works only for approximately 1/3 of the centre
area of the screen.)
Focus When the subject is
focused
When the subject is not
focused
Focus indication AOn Blinks
AF area BGreen —
Sound Beeps 2 times —
ョㄏピ
LOW
LOW
STAR
87
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,
re-adjust the focus.
Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus
• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast.
• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects.
• When it is dark or when jitter occurs.
• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near
subjects.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
88
Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)
Applicable modes:
The method for achieving focus when the shutter button is
pressed halfway is set.
Set the focus mode lever.
Item Scene (recommended)
[AFS/
AFF]
[AFS]
(Auto
Focus
Single)
Subject is still
(Scenery,
anniversary
photograph, etc.)
“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Single”.
Focus is set automatically when
the shutter button is pressed
halfway. It stays locked while the
button is pressed halfway, allowing you to record
different compositions.
[AFF]
(Auto
Focus
Flexible)
Movement cannot
be predicted
(Children, pets,
etc.)
“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Flexible”.
In this mode, focusing is performed
automatically when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement
automatically.
You can switch the setting with [AFS/AFF] in the [Rec]/[Motion Picture]
menu.
[AFC]
(Auto Focus
Continuous)
Subject is moving
(Sport, trains, etc.)
“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Continuous”.
In this mode, while the shutter
button is pressed halfway, focusing
is constantly performed to match
the movement of the subject.
[MF] Set the focus manually. (P101)
89
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Applicable modes:
Customise the operation settings of Auto Focus to suit the movement of your subject.
• This item works only when the Focus Mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC].
When recording using [AFF], [AFC]
• When the subject is moving, the focusing is performed by predicting the subject position at
the time of recording. (Movement prediction)
• It may take time to focus on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or
suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• Focus Mode settings of [AFF] and [AFC] work in the same manner as [AFS] in the following
situations:
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
– In low light situations
• [AFF] is not available when recording 6K/4K photos. [Continuous AF] works during recording.
• The Focus Mode setting cannot be changed when recording is performed with the Post Focus
function.
Customising the operation settings of Auto Focus for picture taking
> [Rec] > [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1] Basic setting.
[Set 2] Settings when object move in only one direction and quickly.
[Set 3] Setting for slow random movement.
[Set 4] Settings for rapid and random movement.
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
90
∫Adjusting the AF Custom settings
1Press 2/1 to select the AF Custom setting.
2Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1
to adjust.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the default setting.
3Press [MENU/SET].
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity to be applied when adjusting the focus according
to the movement of the subject.
r
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can bring
different subjects into focus one after another.
s
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera waits for a short period of time before re-adjusting the
focus. This allows you to prevent the focus from being
accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object moves
across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity level at which the camera switches or moves the
AF area to suit the movement of the subject.
r
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
immediately switches or moves the AF area to keep the
subject in focus.
s
The camera switches or moves the AF area at a gradual
pace. Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or
by obstacles in front of the camera will be minimised.
[Moving object
prediction]
Sets the level at which object motion detection is activated in
response to a change in the speed of the subject.
0
This is suited to still subjects. Effects caused by a slight
movement of the subject or by obstacles in front of the
camera will be minimised.
1 These are suited to a subject that changes its moving speed.
You can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement
of the subject.
2
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
91
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Setting the Auto Focus Mode
Applicable modes:
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and
number of the subjects to be selected.
Press [ ].
• You can also use the button as a function button. (P60)
([Face/Eye
Detection])
The camera automatically detects the person’s face
and eyes.
An eye closer to the camera will be in focus, while
the exposure will be optimised for the face.
(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
• Up to 15 faces can be detected. Eyes that can be
detected are only those of the face that is in focus.
• When the camera detects a face, the AF area and
the mark indicating the eye to be in focus A are
displayed.
Yellow:
AF area for the face to be in focus
White:
AF areas for the faces that will not be brought into focus. These are
displayed when more than one face is detected.
• You can change the eye to be in focus by touching the eye in the
yellow area.
• If you touch [ ] or press [MENU/SET], the eye focus setting will be
cancelled.
ョㄏピ
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
92
([Tracking])
The camera focuses on the subject you specify.
The exposure will be optimised for the subject.
(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
Focus and exposure will keep on following the
subject even if it moves. (Dynamic tracking)
Button operation:
Aim the AF tracking frame B over the subject, and
press the shutter button halfway.
Touch operation:
Touch the subject.
• If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and
disappear.
• The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked (green while the
shutter button is pressed halfway).
• Lock is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed, or [ ] is touched.
([225-Area])
Up to 225 AF areas can be focused.
This is effective when a subject is not in the centre
of the screen.
, etc.
([Custom Multi])
From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the
optimum shape of the AF area for the subject. (P93)
([1-Area])
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area
on the screen.
([Pinpoint])
You can achieve a more precise focus on a point
that is smaller than [Ø].
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen
that lets you check the focus will be enlarged.
93
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
1Press [ ].
2Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press 3.
3Press 2/1 to select a setting and then press 4.
AThe current shape of the AF area
4Select AF areas.
BThe selected AF areas
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
Setting the shape of the AF area ([Custom Multi])
([Horizontal
Pattern])
Horizontal line
This shape is
convenient for taking
panning shots or
similar shots.
([Vertical
Pattern])
Vertical line
This shape is
convenient for
recording objects,
such as buildings.
([Central
Pattern])
Cluster placed at the
centre
This shape is
convenient when you
want to bring the
centre area into focus.
//
([Custom1]/
[Custom2]/
[Custom3])
You can select a customised setting.
Button operation Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3/4/2/1Touching Moves the position
// Pinching in/
out Changes the size
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: The position
is reset to the centre
Second time: The size
is reset to the default
ヤピヤビヤヒ
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
94
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Drag your finger over the parts you want to set as AF
areas.
• If you touch one of the selected AF areas, the selection of
the area will be cancelled.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the AF area, and then press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• If you press [DISP.], all the selections will be cancelled.
Press [Fn2] to set.
∫Registering the set AF area to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
1On the screen in step 3 on P93, press 3.
2Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and press
[MENU/SET].
∫Restrictions on Auto Focus Mode
• The AF Mode is fixed to [Ø] in the following cases.
– When using the Digital Zoom
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
• The Auto Focus Mode is fixed to [š] when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• It cannot be set the Auto Focus Mode in the following cases.
– When recording with the Post Focus function
([Face/Eye Detection])
• If no faces are detected, the AF Mode operates as [ ].
([Tracking])
• In situations where AF Tracking does not work correctly due to certain recording conditions,
such as when the subject is small or the location is dark, the operation of [Ø] is performed.
• [ ] cannot be used with [Time Lapse Shot].
• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/
[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome] ([Photo Style])
([Pinpoint])
• In the following case, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– [AFF]/[AFC] (Focus Mode)
Touch operation
Button operation
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with [ ]/[ ]/[ ] back to the default
setting.
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
ヤヒ ヤビ
ヤピ
95
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Specifying the AF area position
∫Creating separate AF areas for horizontal and vertical orientations
Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen P96
Specifying the AF area position with the joystick P98
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad P99
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function P100
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [Focus Switching for
Vert / Hor]
[ON]
The last specified positions of the AF area
(when [Ø] or [ ] is set) and the MF Assist
display are stored separately for the camera’s
horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical
orientations, left and right, are available).
[OFF] Sets the same setting for both horizontal and vertical orientations.
• Before moving or resizing the AF area, cancel the Touch Shutter function.
• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the [Metering Mode]
(P212) is set to [ ].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
96
Applicable modes:
When [š], [ ], [Ø] or [ ] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the position
and size of the AF area.
1Press [ ].
2Select [š], [ ] or [Ø] and press 4.
3Change the position and size of the AF area.
4Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed in the touched position, when the [š]
is selected.
Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.
• Only [i] display (centre point of selected group) will remain on the screen, when the [ ]
is selected.
Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen
When selecting [š], [ ], [Ø]
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1Touching Moves the position
Pinching out/in Changes the size
(in small steps if [š] or [Ø] has been selected)
/sChanges the size
(in large steps if [š] or [Ø] has been selected)
[DISP.] [Reset] First time: The position is reset to the centre
Second time: The size is reset to the default
97
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
You can set the focus position precisely by enlarging the screen.
1Press [ ].
2Select [ ] and press 4.
3Press 3/4/2/1 to set the focus position and then
press [MENU/SET].
4Move [+] to the position to be in focus.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge/reduce the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge/
reduce the picture by approximately 3k to 10k.
• You can also take pictures by touching [ ].
5Press [MENU/SET] to set.
When selecting [ ]
Button
operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1Touching Moves [+].
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
sEnlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full screen).
[DISP.] [Reset] Returns you to the screen in step 3.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
98
Applicable modes:
When using [š], [ ], [ ], [Ø] or [ ] of Auto Focus Mode, you can specify the
position of the AF area displayed on the recording screen with the joystick.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Move the joystick3/4/2/1 to move the AF area.
• You can change the size of the AF area by rotating the
front/rear dial.
• Press the joystick to switch between the default AF area
position and the position you have set.
The enlarged display will appear when [ ] ([Pinpoint]) is
set.
3Press the shutter button halfway to set.
• Press the joystick while the recording screen is displayed
to switch between the default AF area position and the
position you have set.
Specifying the AF area position with the joystick
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Joystick Setting] > [D.FOCUS
Movement]
MENU
99
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Applicable modes:
You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by
touching the monitor.
• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position.
If you press [DISP.] before determining the focus position, the AF area frame returns to the
centre position.
• To cancel the AF area frame when the Auto Focus Mode (P91) is set to [š] ([Face/Eye
Detection]), [ ] ([Tracking]) or [ ] ([225-Area]), press [MENU/SET].
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad
>[Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the
Viewfinder by touching a
desired position on the Touch
Pad.
[OFFSET]
Moves the AF area of the
viewfinder according to the
distance you drag the touch
pad (P52).
[OFF] —
• The Touch Shutter function (P53) is disabled when using [Touch Pad AF].
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
100
Applicable modes:
∫Optimising the focus for the touched position ([AF])
1Touch the subject.
2(When [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] is set)
Touch [Set].
• (When [ ]/[ ]/[ ] is set) The AF area setting is cleared if you touch [ ].
∫Optimising the focus and brightness for a touched position ([AF+AE])
1Touch the subject you want to optimise the
brightness for.
• The brightness optimisation position is displayed on the
centre of the AF area. The position follows the movement
of the AF area.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively
for the Touch AE.
• Touching [Reset] returns the brightness optimisation
position and the AF area to the centre.
2Touch [Set].
• The AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed on the touched position.
• Touching [ ] (or [ ] when [Ø] is selected) will cancel the [AF+AE] setting.
• When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimised for the
touched position before recording takes place.
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF]
[AF] Optimises the focus for the touched subject.
[AF+AE] Optimises the focus and brightness for the touched subject.
[OFF] —
([Face/Eye
Detection])
The AF area moves to the subject and the size and position setting
screen is displayed. (P96)
([Tracking]) The touched subject is locked. (P92)
([225-Area]) The AF area moves to the subject and the size and position setting
screen is displayed. (P96)
, etc.
([Custom Multi])
The AF area moves to the subject and the appropriate setting
screen is displayed. (P93)
([1-Area]) The AF area moves to the subject and the size and position setting
screen is displayed. (P96)
([Pinpoint]) The AF area moves to the subject and the setup screen for the
enlarged area is displayed. (P97)
MENU
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW 6HW
AE
101
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Manually
Applicable modes:
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens
and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate Auto Focus.
1Set the focus mode lever to [MF].
2Press [ ].
• You can also use the button as a function button. (P60)
• You can also perform the same operation by moving the joystick 3/4/2/1 (when
[D.FOCUS Movement] is set).
3Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the focus position, and press [MENU/SET].
• The assist screen is displayed, enlarging the area. (MF
Assist)
• You can also enlarge the area by rotating the focus ring,
moving the focus lever, or pinching out (P52) the screen
or touching the screen twice.
• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging (P52)
the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] resets the focus position back to the
centre.
4Adjust the focus.
The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.
When using an interchangeable lens
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060/H-HSA12035)
with a focus ring
Rotate to A side:
Focuses on nearby
subject
Rotate to B side:
Focuses on distant
subjects
When using the interchangeable lens
having a focus lever
Move to C side:
Focuses on nearby
subject
Move to D side:
Focuses on distant
subjects
• The focusing speed varies depending on how
far you move the focus lever.
A
B
C
D
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
102
AMF Assist (enlarged screen)
BPeaking
CMF Guide
• The in-focus portions will be highlighted. (Peaking)
• You can check whether the point of focus is to the near
side or to the far side. (MF Guide)
You can perform the following operations:
¢When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing 4 to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge/reduce the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge/
reduce the picture by approximately 3k to 10k.
When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring
Press 1: Focuses on nearby subject
Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects
ASlide bar
• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the
focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide
bar.
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1¢Dragging Moves the enlarged area.
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
sEnlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full
screen).
[DISP.]¢[Reset]¢
First time: The position of the enlarged area is
reset to the centre.
Second time: The magnification level of the
enlarged area is reset to the default.
AF
+
AF
+
103
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
5Press the shutter button halfway.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [MENU/SET].
• If you have enlarged the picture by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever, the
assist screen will close approximately 10 seconds after the operation.
Achieving focus quickly using Auto Focus
If [AF/AE LOCK] is pressed in Manual Focus, Auto Focus will work.
• Auto Focus works at the centre of the frame.
• Auto Focus also works with the following operations.
– Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assigned
– Touching [ ]
– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position
you want to focus on
• This function is not available when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• MF Assist or MF guide may not display depending on the lens used, but you can display MF
Assist by direct operation of the camera, using the touch screen or a button.
• When [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is
enabled, you can set the position of the enlarged MF Assist display for each orientation of the
camera.
• The focus distance reference mark A is a mark used to measure
the focus distance.
Use this when taking pictures with Manual Focus or taking close-up
pictures.
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock] > [AF-ON]
MENU
AF
AF
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
104
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE
Lock)
Applicable modes:
This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the
contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure.
1Align the screen with the subject.
2Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus
or exposure.
• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is cancelled.
• Only the exposure is locked in the default setting.
3While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the
camera as you compose the picture and then
press shutter button fully.
AAE Lock indication
∫Setting the functions of [AF/AE LOCK]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK] Only the exposure is locked.
• When the exposure is set, [AEL] is displayed.
[AF LOCK] Only the focus is locked.
• When the subject is focused, [AFL] is displayed.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
• [AFL] and [AEL] are displayed when the focus and the exposure are
optimised.
[AF-ON] Auto Focus is performed.
• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.
• AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with Manual Focus.
• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is
locked.
• Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
0
60
2.8
AEL
AELAEL
AEL
MENU
105
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Compensating the Exposure
Applicable modes:
Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in
brightness between the subject and the background.
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial to compensate the
exposure.
AExposure Bracket
BExposure Compensation
C[Flash Adjust.]
• You can perform the operations below while the
exposure compensation screen is displayed.
• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and the front dial by pressing [DISP.].
3Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Compensates the exposure
Adjusts the flash output (P158)
3/4Sets the exposure bracket (P140)
Underexposed Properly exposed Overexposed
Compensate the exposure
towards positive.
Compensate the exposure
towards negative.
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
0
OFF
OFF
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
106
• In Manual Exposure Mode, you can compensate the exposure only when the ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
• You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between j5 EV and i5 EV.
You can set a value between j3 EV and i3 EV while recording motion picture or performing
recording with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus function.
• When [Auto Exposure Comp.] in [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the brightness of the
flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation.
(P158)
• When the exposure value is out of the j3EV to i3 EV range, the brightness of the recording
screen will no longer change.
It is recommended to record by checking the actual brightness of the recorded image in the
Auto Review or playback screen.
• The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When
[Exposure Comp. Reset] (P224) is set to [OFF])
107
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Setting the Light Sensitivity
Applicable modes:
This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set.
Setting to a higher figure enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the
resulting pictures coming out dark.
1Press [ ].
2Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the rear
dial.
• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and
the front dial by pressing [DISP.].
A[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
BISO sensitivity
3Rotate the front dial to set the [ISO Auto
Upper Limit Setting].
• Set the [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (or in [ISO Sensitivity
(video)] when using Creative Video Mode).
• It will work when the [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
4Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
AUTO
AUTO
2
00
2
00
4040
ISO
ISO
ISOISOISO
ISOISOISOISOISOISOISO
AUTO
AUTO
ISO
ISO
LIMIT
LIMIT
AUTO
AUTO
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
108
¢1 When the [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] (P214) in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is set to [AUTO].
¢2 Only available when [Extended ISO] is set.
AUTO
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
• Maximum [ISO3200] (With the flash on [ISO1600])¢1
(Intelligent)
The camera detects movement of the subject and then
automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter
speed to suit the movement of the subject and brightness of
the scene to minimise the jitter of the subject.
• Maximum [ISO3200] (With the flash on [ISO1600])¢1
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the
movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed
fully.
L.100¢2, from 200 to 25600 The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.
Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity
200 25600
Recording location
(recommended) When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark
Shutter speed Slow Fast
Noise Less Increased
Jitter of the subject Increased Less
• Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:
– Shutter-Priority AE Mode
– Manual Exposure Mode
• When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO3200].
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the lower limit of the ISO sensitivity is fixed to [ISO400].
• With Creative Video Mode, 6K/4K Photo, or Post Focus, you can set an ISO sensitivity value
that falls in the range below.
– Value range: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] if [Extended ISO] is set)
109
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Applicable modes:
In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of white
takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is closest
to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.
1Press [ ].
2Rotate the rear dial or front dial to select the
White Balance.
• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control
dial.
¢[AWB] is applied when you record motion picture or perform recording with the 6K/4K
Photo or Post Focus function.
[AWB]/
[AWBc]
Adjusting the White Balance automatically
• Under lighting such as incandescent lighting where reddish tones may
occur:
– With [AWB], reddish tones are maintained to reproduce the ambience of
the scene more accurately.
– With [AWBc], reddish tones are suppressed to reproduce the original
colours of the subject more accurately. The same tones as [AWB] may
be applied in a bright environment.
• [AWB] and [AWBc] apply the same tones under light sources where
reddish tones may not occur.
[V]When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky
[Ð]When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky
[î]When taking pictures outdoors in the shade
[Ñ]When taking pictures under incandescent lights
[]
¢When taking pictures with the flash only
AWBc
AWBc
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
110
3Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
∫Auto White Balance
Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on
a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being
used or there is nothing with a colour close to white, Auto White Balance may not function
properly. In a case like this, set the White Balance to a mode other than [AWB] or [AWBc].
1 [AWB] will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
KlKelvin Colour Temperature
[]/
[]/
[]/
[]
Set the White Balance value. Use to match the
condition when taking photographs.
1Press 3.
2Place a white object such as a piece of paper
within the frame at the centre of the screen, and
press [MENU/SET].
• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.
• The same operation can be performed by pressing the shutter button.
• White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too dark.
Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate brightness.
[]/
[]/
[]/
[]
You can set the colour temperature manually for
taking natural pictures in different lighting
conditions.
1Press 3.
2Press 3/4 to select the colour temperature and
then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set a colour temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
• You can set the White Balance Bracket (Colour Temperature) by rotating
the control dial. (P142)
Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture etc., the appropriate White Balance
will vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [AWBc] or [ ], [ ], [ ],
[].
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5500K5500K5500K
1
2
3
4
111
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings
You can finely adjust the White Balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by
setting the White Balance.
1Select the White Balance and then press 4.
2Press 3/4/2/1 to fine-adjust the White Balance.
• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White
Balance graph.
• Pressing [DISP.] resets the position back to the centre.
• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating the control dial. (P142)
3Press [MENU/SET].
Finely adjusting the White Balance
2 : A (AMBER: ORANGE)
1 : B (BLUE: BLUISH)
3 : G (GREEN: GREENISH)
4 : M (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [A] (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to orange.
If you finely adjust the White Balance to [B] (blue), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to blue.
• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [G] (green) or [M] (magenta), [_] (green) or [`]
(magenta) appears beside the White Balance icon on the screen.
GGGGGG
AAAAAABBBBBBB
MMMMMM
112
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode
Applicable modes:
You can change what the camera will do when you press the shutter button.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
[Single] When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is
recorded.
[Burst] (P113) Recordings are made in succession while the shutter button
is pressed.
[6K/4K PHOTO] (P116) When the shutter button is pressed, a 6K/4K photo is
recorded.
[Post Focus] (P128) When the shutter button is pressed, Post Focus recording is
performed.
[Self Timer] (P133) When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes place
after the set time has elapsed.
[Time Lapse/
Animation] (P134, 136)
Pictures are recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion
Animation.
113
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode
Applicable modes:
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst Mode.
∫Setting the burst rate
Select the menu. (P55)
¢1 Number of recordable pictures
¢2 When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
The burst speed will become slower halfway. However, pictures can be taken until the
capacity of the card becomes full. Depending on recording conditions, the number of burst
pictures that can be taken will be reduced.
• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings.
– [Picture Size] (P206)/[Quality] (P207)/[Sensitivity] (P107)/Focus Mode (P88)/[Focus/Release
Priority] (P226)
>[Rec] > [Burst Rate]
[H]
(High speed)
[M]
(Middle speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
Burst speed
(pictures/second)
12 (AFS/MF)
9 (AFF/AFC) 72
Live View during Burst Mode None (AFS/MF)
Available (AFF/AFC) Available Available
¢1With RAW files 60 or more¢2
Without RAW files 600 or more¢2
p
t
AFSAFS
L
4:3
H
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
114
∫About the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the maximum number
of pictures you can take continuously will appear. You can check
the approximate number of pictures that can be taken before the
burst speed slows down.
Example: When 20 pictures can be taken: [r20]
• Once recording starts, the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease. When [r0] appears, the burst speed will slow down.
• When [r99+] is displayed, you can take 100 or more pictures continuously.
Focusing in Burst Mode
The way focus is achieved varies according to the focus mode (P88) setting and the
[Focus/Release Priority] (P226) setting in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu.
¢1 When the subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.
¢2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the
subject.
¢3 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.
Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority] Focus
[AFS]
[AFS/AFF]: [FOCUS]
At the first picture[AFS/AFF]: [BALANCE]
[AFS/AFF]: [RELEASE]
[AFF]¢1
[AFS/AFF]: [FOCUS] Burst speed is set to [H]: Predicted focusing¢3
Burst speed is set to [M], [L]: Normal focusing¢2
[AFS/AFF]: [BALANCE] Predicted focusing¢3
[AFS/AFF]: [RELEASE]
[AFC]¢1
[AFC]: [FOCUS] Burst speed is set to [H]: Predicted focusing¢3
Burst speed is set to [M], [L]: Normal focusing¢2
[AFC]: [BALANCE] Predicted focusing¢3
[AFC]: [RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with Manual Focus
2020r20
0
2
00
115
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
• We recommend using the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional) when you want to
keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode. Refer to P320 for
information about the shutter remote control.
• When the burst speed is set to [H] (when focus mode is [AFS] or [MF]), the exposure is fixed
at the settings used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures as well.
In other cases, the camera adjusts the exposure for each frame.
• It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card. If you take pictures
continuously while saving, the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases. For
continuous shooting, use of a high speed memory card is recommended.
Not available in these cases:
• The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Multi Exp.]
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
116
Recording 6K/4K Photos
Applicable modes:
With 6K Photo, you can take a high-speed burst of pictures at 30 frames/second and save
the desired pictures, each made up of 18 million pixels (approx.), extracted from their burst
file.
With 4K Photo, you can take a high-speed burst of pictures at 60 frames/second and save
the desired pictures, each made up of 8 million pixels (approx.).
• “6K PHOTO” is a high-speed burst recording function which allows you to save pictures
extracted from images recorded with an aspect ratio for still pictures, 4:3 or 3:2, and with an
effective picture size equivalent to a particular number of pixels (approx. 18 megapixels)
produced by images with a size of 6K (approx. 6,000 (horizontal)k3,000 (vertical)).
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card to record 6K/4K photos. (P30)
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Select the picture size and burst speed. (P55)
3Select the recording method. (P55)
>[Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] >
[Picture size / Burst speed]
Use (recommended) Picture size Burst speed
(pictures/second)
[6K 18M] For a larger picture size
[6K] (18M)
[4:3]: (4992k3744)
[3:2]: (5184k3456)
30
[4K H 8M] For a faster burst speed [4K] (8M)
[4:3]: (3328k2496)
[3:2]: (3504k2336)
[16:9]: (3840k2160)
[1:1]: (2880k2880)
60
[4K 8M] For a long burst 30
>[Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] > [Rec Method]
MENU
MENU
117
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
¢1 6K/4K burst file will be recorded and played back in separate files in the following cases.
(You can continue recording without interruption.)
– When using an SDHC memory card: If the file size exceeds 4 GB
– When using an SDXC memory card: If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and
4 minutes or if the file size exceeds 96 GB
¢2 Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.
4Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst]¢1
For capturing the best shot of a
fast-moving subject (e.g., sports,
aeroplanes, trains)
Burst recording is performed while the
shutter button is pressed and held.
The shutter sound will be heard repeatedly.
APress and hold
BRecording is performed
Audio recording: Not available
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]¢1
“S/S” is an
abbreviation of “Start/
Stop”.
For capturing unpredictable photo
opportunities (e.g., plants, animals,
children)
Burst recording starts when the shutter
button is pressed and stops when
pressed again. Start and stop tones will
be heard.
CStart (First)
DStop (Second)
ERecording is performed
Audio recording: Available¢2
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
For recording as needed whenever a
photo opportunity arises (e.g., the
moment when a ball is thrown)
Burst recording is performed for
approximately 1 second before and after
the moment that the shutter button is
pressed. The shutter sound will be heard only once.
FApproximately 1 second
GRecording is performed
Recording length:
Approximately 2 seconds Audio recording: Not available
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
118
5Record a 6K/4K photo.
• If you are using Auto Focus, [Continuous AF] will work during recording. Focus will be
adjusted continuously.
• The camera will perform burst recording of a 6K/4K photo and saves it as a 6K/4K burst file with
a [Rec Format] setting of [MP4].
• 6K/4K burst files are recorded at a frame rate of [30p] or [60p] and playable on the camera
regardless of the [System Frequency] setting.
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed automatically. To
continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display the recording screen.
• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 6K/4K burst files, refer to
P123.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst]
1Press the shutter button halfway.
2Press and hold the shutter button fully for as
long as you want to perform recording.
AAvailable recording time
• Press the button fully slightly in advance. Recording
starts approximately 0.5 seconds after it has been pressed fully.
• If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after the
start of recording, up to a period of approximately 1.5 seconds after
the moment that the finger has been removed may be recorded.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
1Press the shutter button fully to start recording.
2Press the shutter button fully again to stop
recording.
BAvailable recording time
Adding markers to select and save pictures
You can add markers if you press [Fn2] during recording. (Up to 40
markers per recording) When selecting and saving pictures from a
6K/4K burst file, you can skip to the positions where you added
markers.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
Press the shutter button fully.
CNumber of recordings that can be made
• Auto Focus adjusts focus continuously, and except in
Manual Exposure Mode, it also adjusts exposure
continuously.
• Images may not be displayed as smoothly as when recording with the
normal recording screen.
Recording tips
In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as
when the subject is not at the centre, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (P104)
• To reduce camera shake, we recommend that you use a tripod and shutter remote control
(DMW-RSL1: optional) (P320) when using [Light Composition] (P255).
0
5m0404s5m04s
0
5m0404s5m04s
0
120012001200
119
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫Setting Pre-Burst Recording ([6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approximately 1 second before the shutter button is pressed
fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
∫Setting Loop Recording ([6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
With [6K/4K Burst(S/S)], you can perform recording while deleting the oldest recorded
data, allowing you to keep on recording while waiting for a photo opportunity without
replacing the card.
• Once you start recording, the 6K/4K burst file will be recorded and divided approximately every
2minutes.
Approximately the last 10 minutes (up to approximately 12 minutes) will be saved. The
preceding part will be deleted.
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
>[Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] > [Pre-Burst Recording]
• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• Auto Focus operation settings and menus that cannot be set while this function is in use are
the same as those during [6K/4K Pre-Burst] operation.
Battery drainage and camera temperature
• When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster and
the camera temperature rises. Use these functions only when recording with them.
>[Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] > [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)]
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional).
• Up to 12 hours of continuous recording is possible.
• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Not available in these cases:
• [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)] is not possible when there is insufficient free space on the card.
• [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)] is not available for [6K 18M].
MENU
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
120
∫To change the aspect ratio
Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 6K/4K
photos.
∫To record the subject with reduced blur
You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the front dial.
∫Shutter sound for recording
• When using [6K/4K Burst] or [6K/4K Pre-Burst], you can change the electronic shutter sound
settings in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone]. (P237)
When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)], you can set the start/stop tone volume in [Beep
Volume].
• High-speed burst recording can be used quietly when used in combination with [Silent Mode].
∫Scenes not suitable
Recording in extremely bright locations or indoors
When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent/LED
lighting, the colour tone or brightness of the image may change, or horizontal stripes may
appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
Subjects that are moving fast in the horizontal direction
If you record a subject moving fast in the horizontal direction, the subject in the recorded
pictures may appear distorted.
Notes on the 6K/4K Photo function
• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions:
1/1000 seconds or faster.
• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may
increase the noise on the screen.
121
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫The camera’s setup for the 6K/4K Photo function
The camera’s setup is automatically optimised for 6K/4K photo recording.
• The following [Rec] menu items are fixed to the settings below:
• 6K/4K burst files are recorded with the settings indicated below:
Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 6K/4K burst files.
¢Switches to a setting that matches the [Picture size / Burst speed] setting.
• When recording with the 6K/4K Photo function, the ranges for the following functions differ from
the ones available for taking pictures:
– Shutter speed: 1/30th (1/60th when [4K H 8M] is set) to 1/16000th
– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30] ([1/60] when [4K H 8M] is set)
– Exposure Compensation: j3EV to
i3EV
– ISO sensitivity: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] when [Extended ISO] is set)
• The following menu items are disabled:
[Picture Size]¢[6K] (18M)
[4K] (8M)
[Quality] [A]
[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]
[Rec Format] [MP4] [Continuous AF] [ON]
[Rec Quality]¢
[6K/200M/30p]
[4K/150M/60p]
[4K/100M/30p]
[Luminance Level] [0s255]
• When recording with the 6K/4K Photo function, the following functions are disabled:
–Flash
– Bracket Recording
– Programme Shift
– Focus mode (AFF)
– [AF Mode] ( )
– [MF Assist] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
– White Balance ( )
[Intelligent Auto] [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]
[Creative Control] [Simultaneous record w/o filter]
[Rec]
[Picture Size]/[Quality]/[AFS/AFF]/
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([6K/4K Burst(S/S)] only)/
[Color Space]/[Flash]/[Long Shtr NR]/[Shutter Type]/[Shutter Delay]/
[Bracket]/[HDR]
[Custom] [Rec Area]/[Face Recog.]/[Profile Setup]
[Setup] [Economy] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
122
• When [6K 18M] is set, [Aspect Ratio] cannot be set to [16:9] or [1:1].
• The following changes occur when recording 6K/4K photos:
– [Location] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.
– [Simultaneous record w/o filter] in [Filter Settings] is not available.
– It is not possible to use the HDMI output during recording.
• If you use HDMI output, settings will be adjusted as follows:
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst] will be switched to [6K/4K Burst].
– The [Pre-Burst Recording] setting will be switched from [ON] to [OFF].
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available when [6K 18M] is set.
[ZOOM] is not available when [4K H 8M] or [4K 8M] is set.
• [Digital Zoom] is not available when [6K 18M] is set.
• You cannot superimpose recording dates using [Time Stamp Rec].
• When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], [Step Zoom] in [Power Zoom Lens] is disabled.
• Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion
pictures.
• When the drive mode is set to 6K/4K Photo, it is not possible to take pictures while recording
motion picture. (Only when [ ] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
Not available in these cases:
• The 6K/4K Photo function is disabled when using the following settings:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Multi Exp.]
123
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Selecting pictures from 6K/4K burst file and
saving
This section describes how to select pictures from a 6K/4K burst file and save them.
For information on how to record 6K/4K burst files, refer to P116.
1Select an image with the [ ] or [ ] icon on the playback
screen, and press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ] or
[].
• If the image was recorded with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], proceed to step 3.
3Drag the frames to select the frame you want to save
as a picture.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing 2/
1.
• Touch and hold [ ]/[ ] to continuously rewind/forward
frame-by-frame.
4Touch [ ] or [ ] to save the picture.
• A confirmation screen will be displayed.
∫Saving pictures taken with the 6K/4K Photo function at once ([6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving])
You can save pictures of a 6K/4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period
at once.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 2/1 to select the 6K/4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames will be saved as pictures.
3Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved at once.
• Select the frame in the same way as you select pictures from a 6K/4K burst file.
• Pictures will be saved as a group of Burst Mode pictures in JPEG format. (P201)
2Drag the slide bar to make a rough selection of
scenes.
• For information on how to use the slide view screen, refer to
P125.
• If the image was recorded with [6K/4K Burst] or [6K/4K
Burst(S/S)], you can select its scenes on the 6K/4K burst
playback screen by touching [ ] (Fn1). (P126)
Slide view screen
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its shutter
speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.
> [Playback] > [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
Fn2
Fn1
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
124
∫Correcting distortion in pictures ([Reduce Rolling Shutter])
The camera corrects distortion in pictures caused by the electronic shutter (rolling shutter
effect) when you save them.
1On the save confirmation screen in step 4 on P123, touch [Reduce Rolling
Shutter].
• Return to the confirmation screen if it cannot produce any correction result.
2Check the correction result, and touch [Save].
• You can check corrected/uncorrected versions of the picture by touching [Set/Cancel].
∫Reducing the noise produced by high sensitivity ([6K/4K PHOTO Noise
Reduction])
When saving pictures, reduce the noise produced during recording by high ISO sensitivity.
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
Correcting 6K/4K Photos After Recording (Post-Recording Refinement)
• The angle of view of the corrected picture may become narrower.
• Depending on the movement of subjects on the edges of the frame, the corrected picture may
look unnatural.
• You may not be able to correct for images recorded with other devices.
> [Playback] > [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]
• This function is not applied to pictures saved with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
• You may not be able to applied for images recorded with other devices.
MENU
125
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫Navigating the slide view screen
• During marker operation, you can skip to the markers that you added or the beginning or end of
the 6K/4K burst file. Press [Fn2] again to return to the original operation.
Operations during selecting pictures/Selecting pictures on the TV
screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
2/1/Dragging/
/
Selects a frame.
• If you select the frame at the left/right end and then select
another frame preceding/following the selected one, the
previous/next frame set will be displayed in slide view.
2/1
Press and hold
/
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds/forwards frame-by-frame.
sTouching/
Dragging
Selects the frame to be displayed and displays the frames
preceding and following the selected frame in slide view.
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the display.
sSelects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display.
(during enlarged display)
3/4/2/1Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
[Fn1] Displays the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
[Fn2] Switches to marker operation.
s/ Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with colour. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) > [ON]
([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] , Saves the picture
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
1Moves to the next marker.
2Moves to the previous marker.
Fn2
Fn1
Position of the displayed
frame
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
126
∫Navigating the 6K/4K burst playback screen
During pause During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
3/ Continuous playback/Pause (during continuous playback).
4/ Continuous rewind/Pause (during continuous rewind).
1// Fast forward/Frame-by-frame forward (during pause).
2// Fast rewind/Frame-by-frame rewind (during pause).
sTouching/
Dragging
Selects the frames to be displayed (during pause).
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the display (during pause).
sSelects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display
(during enlarged display).
3/4/2/1Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
[Fn1] Displays the slide view screen (during pause).
[Fn2] Switches to marker operation.
s/ Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with colour. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) > [ON]
([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] , Saves the picture (during pause).
• Touch the screen twice to enlarge the display. To return to the original display, touch the
enlarged screen twice.
• To select and save pictures from 6K/4K burst files on a PC, use the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”. (P311)
Please note that it is not possible to edit a 6K/4K burst file as a motion picture.
• To play back and edit 6K/4K burst files recorded with [6K 18M] on a PC, a high-performance
PC environment is required. We recommend choosing and saving pictures with the camera.
Fn2
Fn1
Fn2
127
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen
• 6K burst files recorded with [6K 18M] are output to a TV connected through HDMI at a
resolution of [4K].
• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to either [AUTO] or a setting with a resolution of [4K].
When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
• Set [VIERA Link] in [TV Connection] to [OFF].
• If you display 6K/4K burst files on a TV connected to the camera, they will be displayed only on
the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
• Panasonic TVs equipped with SD card slots cannot directly play back 6K/4K burst files from the
SD card.
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
128
Controlling Focus After Recording (Post Focus/
Focus Stacking)
Applicable modes:
The camera can perform Burst recording in the same picture quality as 6K/4K photo
recording while automatically shifting the focus to different areas.
With Post Focus, after recording is finished, you can select the desired points on the
screen and save pictures in which the selected points are in focus.
With Focus Stacking, you can also merge multiple pictures with different focus points to
widen the focus range.
This function is suited for recording still objects.
• We recommend that you use a tripod when recording images to be used for Focus Stacking.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (P30)
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Select the picture size. (P55)
3Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
6K/4K burst recording while
automatically shifting the
focus.
Touch the desired focus
point.
A picture with the desired
focus point is made.
Recording with the Post Focus function
>[Rec] > [Post Focus]
Picture size Description
[6K 18M]
[6K] (18M)
[4:3]: (4992k3744)
[3:2]: (5184k3456)
Larger-sized pictures can be created.
[4K 8M]
[4K] (8M)
[4:3]: (3328k2496)
[3:2]: (3504k2336)
[16:9]: (3840k2160)
[1:1]: (2880k2880)
The display can be enlarged using [Ex. Tele
Conv.].
MENU
129
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
4Decide on the composition, and press the shutter
button halfway.
• Auto Focus will detect focus areas on the screen.
(Excluding the edges of the screen)
• If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the
focus display (A) will flash. Recording is not possible in this case.
5Press the shutter button fully to start recording.
• The focus point changes automatically while recording.
When the icon (B) disappears, recording automatically
ends.
• A motion picture will be recorded with [Rec Format] set to [MP4]. (Audio will not be
recorded.)
• A motion picture will be recorded at a frame rate of [30p] or [60p]. It can be played back on
the camera regardless of the [System Frequency] setting.
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, a screen that lets you select the desired focus area will
be displayed. (P130)
∫Limitations on the Post Focus function
• Since recording is performed in the same image quality as 6K/4K photos, certain limitations
apply to recording functions and menu settings. For details, refer to “The camera’s setup for the
6K/4K Photo function” on P121.
• In addition to the limitations of the 6K/4K Photo function, the following limitations apply to the
Post Focus function:
– Manual Focus operation is disabled.
– Auto Focus Mode is disabled.
– Motion pictures cannot be recorded.
– [Digital Zoom]/[Time Stamp Rec] is disabled.
– The following [Custom] menu items are disabled:
[Shutter AF]/[Video Button]
• When [6K 18M] is set, [Aspect Ratio] cannot be set to [16:9] or [1:1].
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available when [6K 18M] is set.
[ZOOM] is not available when [4K 8M] is set.
From the time you press the shutter button halfway until the end of recording:
• Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition.
• Do not operate the zoom.
Not available in these cases:
• The Post Focus function is disabled when using the following settings:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Multi Exp.] is set
6K
4:3
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
130
1Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback screen, and
press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].
2Touch the desired focus area.
• If a picture that is in focus is not available for the selected
area, a red frame will be displayed. You cannot save a
picture in this case.
• You cannot select the edges of the screen.
• You can fine-adjust the focus by dragging the slide bar
during enlarged display. (You can also perform the same
operation by pressing 2/1.)
3Touch [ ] to save the picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1/
/Touching Selects a focus area.
• It cannot be selected during enlarged display.
Enlarges the display.
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
[Fn1] Switches to the Focus Stacking function.
(P131)
[Fn2]
In-focus portions are highlighted with colour.
([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) >
[ON] ([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] Saves the picture.
• You cannot choose and save the picture from a TV screen even if the camera is connected to
a TV through an HDMI cable.
Fn2
Fn1
Fn2
131
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Merge multiple pictures extracted from images recorded with the Post Focus function into
a single picture with a wider focus range.
AFocus: closer
BFocus: farther away
1Touch [ ] in step 2 of “Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture”.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [Fn1].
2Touch the merging method.
Merging multiple pictures to widen the focus range (Focus Stacking)
[Auto Merging]
Automatically selects pictures that are suited to be merged, and
merges them into a single picture.
• Priority will be given to pictures with closer focus.
• Pictures will be merged into a single picture and the resulting picture
will be saved when this item is selected.
[Range Merging] Merges pictures with specified focus areas into a single picture.
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
132
3(When [Range Merging] is selected)
Touch the desired focus area.
• Touch the focus area again to cancel the selection.
• Dragging the screen allows you to select multiple areas.
4Touch [ ] to merge the pictures and save the resulting picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the
original picture with the closest focus distance, including the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO
sensitivity, will also be recorded to the new picture.
• Specify at least two areas.
• In-focus areas between the two areas will also be
selected, and the combined in-focus area will be indicated.
• Grey areas indicate areas that may, if selected, cause the
merged picture to look unnatural and areas that cannot be
selected.
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1Touching Selects an area.
[Fn2] [Set/Cancel] Specifies/cancels an area.
[DISP.]
[All] Selects all areas.
(Before selecting areas)
[Reset] Cancels all selections.
(After selecting areas)
[MENU/SET] Merges pictures and saves
the resulting picture.
• The camera may automatically correct the misalignments of pictures caused by camera
shake. If they are corrected, the angle of view becomes slightly narrower when pictures are
merged.
• An unnatural picture may be created if a subject moves during recording or the distance
between subjects is great.
• Very defocused pictures, such as those recorded with a macro lens, may be merged into an
unnatural picture. If you perform recording with a larger aperture value in Aperture-Priority AE
Mode or Manual Exposure Mode, the resulting picture may look less unnatural.
• You may not be able to use Focus Stacking for images recorded with other devices.
Fn2
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
Fn2
6HW&DQFHO
133
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer
Applicable modes:
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Press the shutter button halfway to focus
and then press it fully to take the picture.
• Focus and exposure will be set when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording starts.
∫Setting the self-timer
Select the menu. (P55)
>[Rec] > [Self Timer]
Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed.
After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals.
Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed.
• When using a tripod, etc., this setting is a convenient way to avoid the jitter caused by
pressing the shutter button.
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
Not available in these cases:
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
• Self-timer is disabled in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
134
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/Stop
Motion Animation
Applicable modes:
You can take pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion
Animation. In addition, the pictures taken can be combined
into a motion picture.
• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P39)
∫To display the setup screen before recording
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Display the setup screen.
¢The screen selected with [Time Lapse/Animation] in the recording menu will be
displayed. (The screen will be displayed only when you press [MENU/SET] for the first
time after switching the drive mode dial to [ ].)
∫To switch between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation
Switch the [Mode] setting in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
The camera can automatically take pictures of subjects such as animals or plants as time
elapses and create a motion picture.
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Display the setup screen. (P134)
• Switch to [Time Lapse Shot] if it is not selected. (P134)
• Recorded pictures are displayed as group pictures. (P201)
• If you set [Double Slot Function] to [Relay Rec] and record pictures to more than one card, the
resulting pictures will be recorded into separate groups. In this case, a continuous motion
picture cannot be created.
Button operation Touch operation
[MENU/SET]¢ > [MENU/SET] /
Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals ([Time Lapse Shot])
135
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
• Recording may not be consistent with the set recording interval or the set number of
pictures depending on recording conditions.
3Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
• The recording screen will be displayed. You can also perform the
same operation by pressing [ ] until the recording screen is
displayed.
4Press the shutter button fully.
• The recording starts automatically.
• During recording standby, the power will turn off automatically if no operation is performed
for a certain period. The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the power turned off.
When the recording start time arrives, the power turns on automatically.
To turn on the power manually, press the shutter button halfway.
• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be displayed, asking whether to
proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to P138.
∫Changing the Time Lapse Shot settings
You can change the settings in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
[Start Time]
[Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.
[Start Time
Set]
Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set.
2/1: Select the item (hour/minute)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
[Shooting
Interval]/
[Image Count]
The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.
2/1: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
[Fn1]
Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop
the recording.
Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or
stop the recording (during pause).
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
136
A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together.
1Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2Display the setup screen. (P134)
• Switch to [Stop Motion Animation] if it is not selected.
(P134)
3Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
• The recording screen will be displayed. You can also
perform the same operation by pressing [ ] until the
recording screen is displayed.
• This function is not for use in a security camera.
• [Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– Turning the camera off
During [Time Lapse Shot], you can replace the battery and the card, and then restart by
turning on this unit. (Note that pictures taken after the restart will be saved as a separate set of
group pictures) Turn off this unit when replacing the battery.
• When [Shooting Interval] is set to a longer value, if the camera turns off automatically while
waiting for the next recording, we recommend that you use Time Lapse Shot in Auto Focus
Mode.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [Multi Exp.]
Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion Animation])
[Auto Shooting] [ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF] This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])
2/1: Select the item (second)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
137
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
4Press the shutter button fully.
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
5Move the subject to decide on the composition.
• Repeat recording in the same way.
• If this unit is turned off while recording, a message for
resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is
turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
6Touch [ ] to end the recording.
• It can also be ended by selecting [Time Lapse/Animation]
from the [Rec] menu and then pressing [MENU/SET].
• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on the
confirmation screen.
(If [Pause] has been selected, press the shutter button
fully to resume the recording.)
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be
displayed, asking whether to proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to P138.
∫Changing the settings of Stop Motion Animation
You can change the settings in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
∫Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group
Selecting [Add to Picture Group] in step 2 will display group pictures recorded with [Stop
Motion Animation].
Select a set of group pictures, and then press [MENU/SET].
Recording materials skilfully
• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
• Pressing [(] allows you to check recorded pictures.
Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing [ ].
Pressing [(] again will return you to the recording screen.
• Automatic recording may not take place at set intervals because recording takes time under
certain recording conditions, such as when the flash is used for recording.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one that was
taken.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [Multi Exp.]
30
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
138
To create motion pictures after taking pictures, follow the steps below.
1Select the methods for creating a motion picture.
• The recording format is set to [MP4].
2Press 3/4 to select [OK] and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can also create motion pictures using [Time Lapse Video] (P262) or [Stop Motion
Video] (P262) in the [Playback] menu.
Creating motion pictures from recorded pictures
[Rec Quality]
Sets the quality of a motion picture.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], setting
is fixed to [FHD/24M/24p].
[Frame Rate] Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]:
Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]:
Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
• When creating motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] setting of [4K], recording times are limited
to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
– When using an SDHC Memory Card, you cannot create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
– When using an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
• A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD] cannot be created if the recording time
exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB.
139
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting
Automatically (Bracket Recording)
Applicable modes:
You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting by pressing the
shutter button.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 3/4 to select [More settings] and then press [MENU/SET].
• For information on [More settings], refer to the page that describes each function.
• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
3Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• When Exposure Bracket is selected, the bracket display flashes until all of the pictures
you have set are taken. If you change the bracket settings or turn off the camera before
all of the pictures you have set are taken, the camera restarts recording from the first
picture.
∫To cancel [Bracket Type]
Select [OFF] in step 1.
> [Rec] > [Bracket]> [Bracket Type]
Exposure Bracket Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the exposure. (P140)
Aperture Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the aperture. (P141)
• Available in Aperture-Priority AE Mode or when
the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] in Manual
Exposure Mode.
Focus Bracket Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the focus position. (P141)
White Balance Bracket
Press the shutter button once to take three pictures
with different white balance settings automatically.
(P142)
White Balance Bracket
(Colour Temperature)
Press the shutter button once to take three pictures
with different White Balance Colour Temperature
values automatically. (P142)
• Available when the White Balance is set to [ ],
[ ], [ ] or [ ].
MENU
1
2
3
4
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
140
∫About [More settings] (step 2 in P139)
¢Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
[Step]: [3•1/3], [Sequence]: [0/s/r]
Not available in these cases:
• Bracket recording is disabled in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
• Exposure Bracket is disabled in the following cases.
– When recording using the flash
• White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Colour Temperature) are disabled in the
following cases:
– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
– Creative Control Mode
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
Exposure Bracket
[Step]
Sets the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure
compensation range.
[3•1/3] (Takes three pictures with an interval of 1/3 EV) to [7•1]
(Takes seven pictures with an interval of 1 EV)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which pictures are taken.
[Single Shot Setting]¢
[ ]: Takes one picture each time you press the shutter button.
[ ]: Takes all the pictures set to be taken when you press the
shutter button once.
1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture
d0EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV
• When taking pictures using Exposure Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value,
the pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.
141
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Recording Mode:
∫About [More settings] (step 2 in P139)
• When using burst recording, if you press and hold the shutter button, recording will be
performed until a specified number of pictures are taken.
The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.
Example: when using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)
When the initial position is set to F8.0:
1 first picture, 2 second picture, 3 third picture... 7 seventh picture
∫About [More settings] (step 2 in P139)
¢Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
AFocus: closer
BFocus: farther away
1 first picture, 2 second picture... 5 fifth picture...
Aperture Bracket
[Image Count]
[3], [5]: Takes a specified number of pictures with different aperture
values within the range based on the initial aperture value.
[ALL]: Takes pictures using all aperture values.
Focus Bracket
[Step]
Sets the interval between focus positions.
• The distance by which the focus position moves in each step will be
shorter if the initial position is closer to a subject, and conversely if the
initial position is farther from a subject, the distance will be longer.
[Image Count]¢Sets the number of pictures to be taken.
[Sequence]
[0/s/r]: Alternately moves the focus position closer and farther away
within the range centred on the initial position as you take pictures.
[0/r]: Moves the focus position farther away from the initial position as
you take pictures.
[Sequence]: [0/s/r] [Sequence]: [0/r]
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
・・・ ・・・ ・・・
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
142
∫About [More settings] (step 2 in P139)
Rotate the control dial to adjust the correction range,
and press [MENU/SET].
: Horizontal ([A] to [B])
: Vertical ([G] to [M])
• You can also set the correction range by touching [ ]/[ ]/
[]/[].
∫About [More settings] (step 2 in P139)
Rotate the control dial to adjust the correction range,
and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also set the correction range by touching [ ]/[ ].
• Pictures taken with Focus Bracket are displayed as a set of group pictures. (P201)
• If you set [Double Slot Function] to [Relay Rec] and record pictures to more than one card, the
resulting pictures will be displayed as separate groups.
White Balance Bracket
White Balance Bracket (Colour Temperature)
GGG
GGG
AAA
AAAB
BBB
BBB
MMM
MMM
±300K
5500K
5500K
5500K
143
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabiliser
The camera can activate either the In-Lens Image Stabiliser or In-Body Image Stabiliser, or
it can activate both of them and reduce jitter even more effectively. (Dual I.S. Mode)
Dual I.S.2 ( , , ), which provides more effective correction, is also supported.
For motion picture recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser, which makes
use of the In-Lens Image Stabiliser, In-Body Image Stabiliser, and Electronic Image
Stabiliser.
• The image stabilisers to be activated differ depending on your lens. The icon for the currently
activated image stabiliser is displayed on the recording screen.
¢When [E-Stabilization (Video)] is set to [ON]
When taking pictures When recording
motion pictures
Panasonic lenses compatible with Dual I.S.
Mode
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard)
• For the latest information on compatible
lenses, please refer to our website. (P19)
• If the [ ] or [ ] icon is not
displayed on the recording screen even when
a compatible lens is used, update the lens
firmware to the latest version. (P19)
Lens + Body
(Dual I.S.)
(///)
Lens + Body
(Dual I.S.) ( / ),
5-Axis Hybrid
(/)
¢
Lenses compatible with the image
stabiliser function
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard/Four Thirds System standard)
Lens or Body
(/)
Lens or Body
(),
5-Axis Hybrid
()
¢
Lenses not compatible with the image
stabiliser function
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard/Four Thirds System standard) Body ( / )
Body ( ),
5-Axis Hybrid
()
¢
When using a Leica lens mount adaptor
(optional) or mount adaptor made by
another manufacturer
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
144
Applicable modes:
• When using an interchangeable lens with O.I.S. switch (such as H-ES12060), stabiliser
function is activated if the O.I.S. switch of the lens is set to [ON]. ([ ] is set at the time of
purchase.)
Select the menu. (P55)
Preventing jitter (camera shake)
When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, the self-timer (P133) or the
shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional). (P320)
• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the
moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.
We recommend using a tripod.
– Slow Sync. – Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction
– When you set to a slow shutter speed
> [Rec] > [Stabilizer]
[Operation
Mode]
[]
([Normal])
Camera shake is corrected for up/down,
left/right, and rotational movements.
[]
([Panning])
Camera shake is corrected for up/down
movements.
This mode is ideal for panning (a method of
taking pictures which involves turning the
camera to track the movements of a
subject which continues to move in a fixed direction).
[OFF]
[Stabilizer] does not work. ([ ])
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch to
[OFF].
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
Jitter during motion picture recording is corrected along the vertical,
horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes by making use of the In-Lens Image
Stabiliser, In-Body Image Stabiliser, and Electronic Image Stabiliser. (5-Axis
Hybrid Image Stabiliser)
[ON]/[OFF]
• When [ON] is selected, the angle of view of recorded motion pictures may
become narrower.
[Focal Length
Set]
If the focal length is not set automatically, you can set it manually. (P145)
• When a manually selected focal length is set, a confirmation screen asking
you to change the focal length setting is displayed after you turn on the
camera. Selecting [Yes] allows you to set [Focal Length Set] in [Stabilizer].
MENU
145
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Enter a focal length.
2/1: Select the item (digit); 3/4: Setting
• A focal length ranging from 0.1 mm to 1000 mm can be
set.
3Press [MENU/SET].
∫Registering a focal length
1Perform step 2 in “Setting the focal length of a lens”.
2Press 1 to select the focal length to be overwritten
and then press [DISP.].
• Up to 3 focal length settings can be registered.
∫Setting a registered focal length
On the screen in step 2 of “Setting the focal length of a lens”, press 1 to select the
registered focal lengthand then press [MENU/SET].
Setting the focal length of a lens
>[Rec] > [Stabilizer] > [Focal Length Set]
MENU
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
146
• The Image Stabiliser may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
• It is recommended to disable the Image Stabiliser when using a tripod.
• The stabiliser function may not be effective in the following cases.
Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button.
– When there is a lot of jitter
– When the zoom magnification is high
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When taking pictures while following a moving subject
– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places
• The panning effect in [ ] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.
– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day
– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second
– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly (The
background will not become a blur)
– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily
Not available in these cases:
• In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]
(Panning):
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
• In the following case, the [Stabilizer] will switch from [ ] to [ ] even when a compatible
lens is being used:
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
147
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with the Zoom
Applicable modes:
You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record
landscapes, etc.
Optical zoom
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view
Interchangeable lens
with a zoom ring
(H-ES12060/
H-FS12060/
H-HSA12035)
Rotate the zoom ring.
Interchangeable lens
that supports the
power zoom
(electrically operated
zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies depending on
how far you move the lever.)
• If you assign [Zoom Control] to a function
button, you can operate the optical zoom
slowly by pressing 2/1 or fast by
pressing 3/4.
For information on how to operate, refer to step 2 and the
subsequent steps on P149.
Interchangeable lens
that does not support
the zoom
The optical zoom is not available.
T
W
T
W
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
148
Applicable modes:
Extra Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without
deteriorating the picture quality.
• Set the picture size to [M]or [S] (picture sizes indicated with ), and set the quality to
[A] or [›].
Raising the telescopic effect
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
When taking
pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Rec])
1.4k: [ M]
2.0k: [ S]
1.4k: When recording 6K/4K photos¢ ([16:9]/[1:1])
1.5k: When recording 6K/4K photos¢ ([3:2])
1.6k: When recording 6K/4K photos¢ ([4:3])
¢Only when [4K H 8M], [4K 8M] is set
When recording
motion pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
1.4k (motion pictures size is set to [4K] or [C4K] in
[Rec Quality])
2.7k (motion pictures size is set to [FHD] in [Rec
Quality])
149
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
∫Increasing the zoom magnification in steps
• This can be used only when recording pictures.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Set a function button to [Zoom Control]. (P60)
3Press the function button.
4Press 2/1 or 3/4.
• The zoom operation is terminated when the function button is pressed again or a certain
amount of time passes.
AOptical Zoom range (Focal length)¢
BExtra Tele Conversion range for still picture recording
(Zoom magnification)
¢This zoom slider is displayed when using an
interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom.
• A constant zoom speed will be set.
• The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation.
∫Fixing the zoom magnification at the maximum level
Select the menu. (P55)
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ZOOM]
3/1:Tele (Enlarges distant subject)
4/2:Wide (Widens angle of view)
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [TELE CONV.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ON]
[OFF] [TELE CONV.]/[ON]
MENU
EX1.0x EX2.0x
4:3 4:3
MENU
MENU
4:3 4:3
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
150
Applicable modes:
Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in
up to four times the original zoom magnification.
(Continuous zooming is not possible.)
• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] (P60) in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you
can display the Extra Tele Conversion setting screen for both pictures and motion pictures by
pressing the assigned function button. While this screen is displayed, you can change the
[Picture Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ]
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When a frame rate of 150fps or higher is set for [Variable Frame Rate]
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
• In the following case, [ZOOM] does not work:
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [4K H 8M], [4K 8M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (only when [4K 8M] is set)
[Digital Zoom]
> [Rec] > [Digital Zoom] > [4t]/[2t]
• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P133) for
taking pictures.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
MENU
151
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is
compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
• This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom (electrically
operated zoom).
Changing the settings for a power zoom lens
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others] > [Power Zoom Lens]
[Disp Focal
Length]
When you zoom, the focal distance is
displayed and you can confirm the zoom
position.
AFocal distance indication
BCurrent focal distance
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with this setting
[ON], the zoom will stop at positions
corresponding to predetermined distances.
CStep zoom indication
• This setting does not work when recording
motion pictures or recording with [6K/4K
Pre-Burst].
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not change.
[Photo]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens with a zoom
lever and zoom ring is attached.
When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled
to prevent accidental operation.
MENU
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
152
(Optical Zoom and Extra Tele Conversion for still picture recording are operable)
• If you are using an interchangeable lens not supporting power zoom (H-ES12060/H-FS12060/
H-HSA12035), you can only operate Extra Tele Conversion for pictures by setting [Ex. Tele
Conv.] (P148) to [ZOOM].
1Touch [ ] .
2Touch [ ] .
• The slide bar is displayed.
3Perform zoom operations by dragging
the slide bar.
• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched
position.
• Touch [ ] again to end touch zoom operations.
Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom)
[ ]/[ ] Zooms slowly
[ ]/[ ] Zooms quickly
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
××
153
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with the External Flash
(Optional)
Applicable modes:
You can attach a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) and take
pictures with it.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for how to attach the external flash.
∫Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot shoe.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the
direction indicated by arrow 2 while pressing it in
the direction indicated by arrow 1.
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
In the following cases, the flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
• When recording motion pictures
• When recording 6K/4K photos
• When recording with the Post Focus function
• When using the electronic shutter
• When an image effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
Using the flash skilfully
• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo
may turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be
obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
154
∫Using a external flash by connecting with a flash synchro socket
• You can use an external flash by connecting a synchro cable
with a flash synchro socket. The socket has a lock screw to
prevent the cable falling off.
• Remove the flash synchro socket cap by turning in the direction
of the arrow.
• Be careful not to lose the flash synchro socket cap.
• The flash synchro socket has no polarity. You can use a synchro
cable regardless of its polarity.
• Use the flash with a synchronisation voltage of 400 V or less.
• Do not use the synchro cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
When using other commercially available external flashes without
communication functions with the camera
• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash
in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO
sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.
• Set to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the
same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be
compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE
Mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Programme AE Mode
because the aperture value cannot be fixed.)
• Do not bring any objects near the flash. The heat and light from the flash may cause the
objects to deform or discolour.
• It may take time to charge the flash if you repeatedly take pictures. You must wait a moment to
take the next picture while the flash icon is blinking red indicating the flash is charging.
• You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even
when attaching the external flash.
• If you record at close range with a wide angle, light from the flash may be blocked by the lens,
darkening the lower part of the screen.
• Do not use commercially available external flashes with high-voltage synchro terminals,
reverse polarity or functions that enable them to communicate with the camera. Doing so may
cause the camera to malfunction or operate incorrectly.
• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach
from the camera.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.
155
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
• [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is available only when an external flash is attached.
Applicable modes:
Select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
• Firing mode cannot be set when using a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional). It can be set only when using an external flash that does not use a battery (supplied
with some models of Panasonic digital cameras).
1Select the menu. (P55)
2(When [MANUAL] is selected)
Select the menu.
3Press 2/1 to set the luminosity ratio and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/64] in steps of [1/3].
Changing the firing mode
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Firing Mode]
[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[MANUAL]
Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. In [TTL] you can shoot the
photograph you want even when shooting dark scenes that may
otherwise be too brightly lit by the flash.
• When [MANUAL] is set, the luminosity ratio ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on
the flash icon on the screen.
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Manual Flash Adjust.]
MENU
MENU
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
156
Applicable modes:
Set the flash to match the recording.
Select the menu. (P55)
¢It can be set only when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF] and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the external flash’s settings.
The flash is activated twice.
The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ] or [ ] is
set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated.
• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from
the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.
∫Available flash settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.
(±: Available, —: Not available)
Changing Flash Mode
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Mode]
‰
([Forced Flash
On])
([Forced On/
Red-Eye])¢
The flash is activated every time regardless
of the recording conditions.
• Use this when your subject is back-lit
or under fluorescent light.
([Slow Sync.])
([Slow Sync./
Red-Eye])¢
When taking pictures against a dark
background landscape, this feature will slow
the shutter speed when the flash is
activated. Dark background landscape will
appear brighter.
• Use this when you take pictures of
people in front of a dark background.
• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod
can enhance your photos.
Œ([Forced Flash
Off])
The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.
• Use this when you take pictures in places where the use of
flash is not permitted.
Recording Mode ‰ Œ
Programme AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode ±±±±±
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
Manual Exposure Mode ±±——±
• In Intelligent Auto Mode ( or ), the flash will be set to [ ] or [Œ]. (P67)
MENU
157
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
∫Shutter speed for each flash setting
¢This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure
Mode.
• When the flash is activated the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/250th of a
second.
• In Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified
scene.
Applicable modes:
2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures
of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.
Select the menu. (P55)
Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)
‰
1/60th¢ to 1/250th 1 to 1/8000th
Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
1st curtain synchro
The normal method when taking pictures with the flash.
[2ND]
2nd curtain synchro
The light source appears behind the subject and picture
becomes dynamic.
• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND].
• Only available when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF]. (P160)
• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [Flash Synchro] may deteriorate.
• You cannot set [ ] or [ ] when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND].
MENU
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
158
Applicable modes:
Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can adjust from [j3 EV] to [i3 EV] in steps of 1/3 EV.
• Select [n0] to return to the original flash output.
Applicable modes:
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Adjust the flash output
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Adjust.]
•[i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.
• It can be set only when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF] and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
(P155, 160)
Synchronising the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Auto Exposure Comp.]
• For details on Exposure Compensation, refer to P105.
MENU
MENU
159
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes
Applicable modes:
By using flashes that support wireless recording (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/
DMW-FL200L: optional), you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the
flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
1Attach the flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional)
to the camera.
2Set the wireless flashes to RC Mode and then place them.
• Set a channel and groups for the wireless flash.
∫Placing wireless flashes
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing toward the camera.
The following figure shows the estimated controllable range when you take pictures by
holding the camera horizontally. Controllable range differs depending on the surrounding
environment.
Placement range [when a flash
(DMW-FL360L: optional) is attached] Placement example
• In this placement example, flash C is placed to erase the shadow of the subject that flashes A
and B will create.
• The recommended number of wireless flashes for each group is three or less.
• If the subject is too close, signal flashing may affect the exposure.
If you set [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lower the output with a diffuser or similar product,
the effect will be reduced.
5m
5m 7m
7m(23 feet)
(23 feet)
(16 feet)
(16 feet)
50°50°
50°50°
30°30°
30°30°
A
B
C
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
160
3Select the menu. (P55)
4Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
• Press [DISP.] to fire a test-flash.
AFiring Mode
BFlash output
CLuminosity ratio
¢1 Not available when [Wireless FP] is set to [ON].
¢2 This option is not displayed when the flash (DMW-FL200L: optional) is attached to the
camera.
>[Rec] > [Flash]
[Wireless] Select [ON].
[Wireless Channel] Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes in
step 2.
[Wireless Setup] Proceed to step 4.
[External
Flash]¢1
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]¢2:Flash output is set by the external flash.
[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash manually.
[OFF]: The flash on the camera side emits only communication light.
[Flash Adjust.]
Set the flash output of the camera manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when [Firing Mode] is set to
[MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]¢1:The wireless flashes automatically set the output.
[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will not fire.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjust the output of the wireless flashes manually when [Firing Mode] is set to
[TTL].
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes when [Firing Mode] is set to
[MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
MENU
161
6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash
During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash
firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Select the menu. (P55)
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
Using other settings for wireless flash recording
Enabling FP firing for the wireless flashes
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Wireless FP]
Setting the output of communication light
>[Rec] > [Flash] > [Communication Light]
MENU
MENU
162
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture
Applicable modes:
The camera can record 4K motion pictures in MP4 or MOV format or full high definition
motion pictures that comply with the AVCHD standard. Audio is recorded in stereo.
1Start recording by pressing the motion
picture button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Available recording time
• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode
is possible.
• The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while
recording motion pictures.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
• Before recording, the available recording time display
indicates the recordable time based on the amount of
free space on the card; during recording, it indicates the
remaining time for continuous recording.
• h: hour, m: minute, s: second
2Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.
• In Creative Video Mode, motion pictures are recorded at the selected ISO sensitivity; in other
modes, they are recorded using [AUTO] (for motion pictures).
• You can display the available recording time before recording in Creative Video Mode. In other
modes, it can be displayed by setting [Video-Priority Display] (P231) to [ON].
• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view
changes at the start of motion picture recording.
When [Rec Area] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ ], angle of view
during motion picture recording is displayed.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
• The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are
using, and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.
1m
37
37s
1m37s
3s
3s
3s
163
7. Recording Motion Pictures
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 3/4 to select [Rec Quality] and then press [MENU/SET].
• Available items differ depending on [Rec Format] and [System Frequency] (P240).
• [Rec Quality] is not available when [Anamorphic(4:3)] is set.
• If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you, try
the following:
– Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
motion picture using [Video Divide] (P261) in the [Playback] menu.
– Set the camera to Creative Video Mode, and use a shutter remote control (optional) to
record motion pictures. (P320)
• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative
Control Mode)
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
Setting the format, size and frame rate
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format]
[AVCHD] This data format is suitable for when playing back on a high-definition
TV, etc.
[MP4] This data format is suitable for when playing back on a PC, etc.
[MP4 (LPCM)] The MP4 data format for image editing.
[MOV] Data format for image editing.
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
164
When [AVCHD] is selected
¢1 AVCHD Progressive
¢2 Sensor output: 29.97 frames/second
¢3 Sensor output: 25.00 frames/second
When [MP4] is selected
Item System
frequency Size Frame rate Bit rate YUV/bit Image
compression
[FHD/28M/60p]¢1
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
1920k1080 59.94p 28 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/17M/60i] 1920k1080 59.94i 17 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/24M/30p] 1920k1080 59.94i¢224 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/24M/24p] 1920k1080 23.98p 24 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/28M/50p]¢1
50.00Hz
(PAL)
1920k1080 50.00p 28 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/17M/50i] 1920k1080 50.00i 17 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/24M/25p] 1920k1080 50.00i¢324 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
Item System
frequency Size Frame rate Bit rate YUV/bit Image
compression
[4K/100M/30p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
3840k2160 29.97p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/100M/24p] 3840k2160 23.98p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/28M/60p] 1920k1080 59.94p 28 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/20M/30p] 1920k1080 29.97p 20 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/24M/24p] 1920k1080 23.98p 24 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/100M/25p]
50.00Hz
(PAL)
3840k2160 25.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/28M/50p] 1920k1080 50.00p 28 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/20M/25p] 1920k1080 25.00p 20 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/24M/24p] 24.00Hz
(CINEMA) 1920k1080 24.00p 24 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
165
7. Recording Motion Pictures
When [MP4 (LPCM)], [MOV] is selected
Item System
frequency Size Frame rate Bit rate YUV/bit Image
compression
[C4K/10bit/150M/24p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
4096k2160 23.98p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[C4K/8bit/100M/24p] 4096k2160 23.98p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/150M/60p] 3840k2160 59.94p 150 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/10bit/150M/30p] 3840k2160 29.97p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 3840k2160 29.97p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/10bit/150M/24p] 3840k2160 23.98p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 3840k2160 23.98p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/60p] 1920k1080 59.94p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/30p] 1920k1080 29.97p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p] 1920k1080 23.98p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/150M/50p]
50.00Hz
(PAL)
3840k2160 50.00p 150 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/10bit/150M/25p] 3840k2160 25.00p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 3840k2160 25.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/50p] 1920k1080 50.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/25p] 1920k1080 25.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[C4K/10bit/150M/24p]
24.00Hz
(CINEMA)
4096k2160 24.00p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[C4K/8bit/100M/24p] 4096k2160 24.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/10bit/150M/24p] 3840k2160 24.00p 150 Mbps 4:2:2/10 bit Long GOP
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 3840k2160 24.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p] 1920k1080 24.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
7. Recording Motion Pictures
166
∫About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures
Even if motion pictures suit their respective playback devices, their image or sound quality
may be poor or their recording information may not be displayed correctly when played
back, or they may not be able to be played back. If you experience such issues, play them
back on this camera.
• To play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/60p], [FHD/28M/50p], [FHD/24M/30p],
[FHD/24M/25p] or [FHD/24M/24p] in [AVCHD] with another device, or to transfer them to
another device, you need a compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or a PC on which the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311) is installed.
• For information on motion pictures recorded with their size set to [4K] or [C4K] in [Rec Quality],
refer to “Watching 4K motion pictures on a TV/ Saving 4K motion pictures on your PC or
recorder” on P307.
• Motion pictures in 4:2:2/10 bit format are intended for editing on a computer used for video
production. As such, they are not supported by TVs, recorders, and players manufactured by
Panasonic.
• The higher the “Bit rate” value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera
employs the “VBR” recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the
subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is
recorded.
• When [Miniature Effect] is selected for Creative Control Mode, you cannot select the items
used for 4K motion pictures or 4:2:2/10 bit motion pictures.
• To record motion pictures in [MP4 (LPCM)], [MOV], or 4K format, use a UHS Speed Class 3
card. (P30)
• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K motion pictures are recorded at reduced Auto Focus
speeds. It may be difficult to focus on the subject with Auto Focus, but this is not a
malfunction.
167
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting (P88) and the [Continuous AF]
setting in the [Motion Picture] menu.
• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC], if you press the shutter button halfway
while recording a motion picture, the camera will re-adjust the focus.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded when
the Auto Focus is operated while recording a motion picture.
It is recommended to record with [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu set to [OFF], if
the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise.
• When operating the zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus.
Applicable modes:
How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF])
Focus mode [Continuous AF] Description of settings
[AFS]/[AFF]/
[AFC]
[ON] The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects
during recording.
[OFF] The camera maintains the focus position at the start of
recording.
[MF] [ON]/[OFF] You can focus manually. (P101)
Customising the operation settings of Auto Focus for motion picture
recording ([AF Custom Setting(Video)])
> [Motion Picture] > [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Records motion pictures using the customised Auto Focus operation settings.
[OFF] Records motion pictures using the default Auto Focus operation settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
Sets the speed at which focus moves during Auto Focus.
[r] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[s] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the tracking sensitivity of Auto Focus.
[r] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera immediately readjusts the focus.
[s] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera waits for a little before readjusting the
focus.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Continuous AF] is set to [OFF]
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
168
Applicable modes:
You can record still pictures while recording a motion picture. (Simultaneous recording)
During motion picture recording, press the shutter
button fully to record a still picture.
• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while recording
still pictures.
• Recording with the Touch Shutter function (P53) is also
available.
∫Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode
Applicable modes:
Select the menu. (P55)
Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures
> [Motion Picture] > [Picture Mode in Rec.]
[]
([Video Priority])
• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the [Rec Quality]
setting for motion pictures.
• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or
[].
(When set to [ ], still pictures will be recorded in [Quality] of [A].)
• Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion
picture.
(A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to 20 pictures)
[]
([Photo Priority])
• Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be
recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
• Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion
picture.
(A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to 10 pictures)
• The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to [16:9].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When the frame rate for motion pictures is set to [24p] in [Rec Quality] (only when [ ]
([Photo Priority]) is set)
– When [Rec Quality] is set to [C4K]
– When the drive mode is set to 6K/4K Photo (only when [ ] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Motion Picture] menu (only when [ ] ([Photo Priority])
is set)
13
13
13
MENU
169
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
This unit automatically records time code during motion
picture recording.
• Time codes are not recorded on motion pictures recorded when
the [Rec Format] is set to [MP4].
Setting the recording method of time code
> [Motion Picture] > [Time Code]
[Time Code
Display]
Set whether or not the time code is displayed on the recording screen/
playback screen.
[Count Up]
Sets the time code count method.
[REC RUN]:
Counts the time code only when recording motion pictures.
[FREE RUN]:
Counts the time code even when not recording (including when this unit is
turned off).
• The setting is fixed to [REC RUN] in the following cases.
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
[Time Code
Value]
Sets the start point (starting time) for the time code.
[Reset]:
Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)
[Manual Input]:
Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.
[Current Time]:
Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to 00.
[Time Code
Mode]
Sets the time code recording method.
[DF] (Drop Frame):
The camera modifies the difference between recorded time and time code.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF] (Non-Drop Frame):
Records the time code without drop frame.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)
• The setting is fixed to [NDF] in the following cases.
– When [System Frequency] is set to [50.00Hz (PAL)] or [24.00Hz
(CINEMA)]
– When the motion picture frame rate is set to [24p] in [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time
Code Output]
Generates time code for images output through HDMI.
• [HDMI Time Code Output] can only be set in Creative Video Mode.
• When using the HDMI output and outputting videos that do not include time
codes (e.g., when [Rec Format] is set to [MP4]), a time code will not be
output.
• The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.
TC 00:01:30:00TC 00:01:30:00
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
170
∫Conditions for outputting a time code to HDMI output
A time code is output to video from the HDMI output only when all the following conditions
are satisfied.
Applicable modes:
Display the microphone level on the recording screen.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [Mic Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Mic Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].
Applicable modes:
Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (j12 dB to i6dB).
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
Applicable modes:
The camera adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising the sound distortion
(crackling noise) when the volume is too high.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
In recording
• When [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to
[ON].
• In Creative Video Mode.
• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD], [MP4
(LPCM)] or [MOV].
In playback
• When [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to
[ON].
• When playing back a motion picture recorded
with Creative Video Mode.
• When [HDMI Mode (Play)] in [TV Connection]
is set to [AUTO].
Displaying/setting the sound input level
[Mic Level Disp.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Disp.]
[Mic Level Adj.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Adj.]
[Mic Level Limiter]
>[Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Limiter]
MENU
MENU
MENU
171
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
Record motion pictures and pictures with superimposed
recording dates.
• You cannot delete recording dates after superimposing
them.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Recording dates based on the [Clock Set] setting are recorded.
• The recording date display is recorded to the bottom left of the screen.
Recording images with superimposed recording dates ([Time Stamp
Rec])
> [Motion Picture] > [Time Stamp Rec]
• Recording dates are not recorded to 6K/4K burst files and RAW images.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
– When [Anamorphic(4:3)] is set
– When [Color Bars] is set
10:00:00:00 2017. 12. 01
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
172
Applicable modes:
Display colour bars and output a test tone.
1Select the menu. (P55)
• Colour bars will be displayed and a test tone will be output.
• You can set the test tone level from among three options (s12 dB, s18 dB, and s20 dB)
by rotating the control dial.
• If you press the motion picture button, the colour bars and the test tone will be recorded as
a motion picture.
2Press [MENU/SET] to exit the menu.
Displaying colour bars/Outputting a test tone
> [Motion Picture] > [Color Bars]
[SMPTE] [EBU] [ARIB]
Colour bars compliant with
SMPTE
Colour bars compliant with
EBU
Colour bars compliant with
ARIB
• The brightness and colour tone that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder may differ
from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
Check the final picture quality on another device such as an external monitor.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
173
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Pictures in Creative Video
Mode
Recording Mode:
It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity and
record motion pictures.
You can record motion picture with additional effects, such as the following:
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select the menu. (P55)
• The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the
operation for setting the mode dial to , , or .
Recording in Slow or Fast Motion ([Variable Frame Rate]) P176
Moving the focus position smoothly to a registered position ([Focus
Transition]) P178
Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a Fixed
Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping]) P179
> [Creative Video] > [Exposure Mode] > [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
P
7. Recording Motion Pictures
174
3Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is
operated during the recording of a motion picture.
Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.
4Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop
recording.
∫Changing the [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings
Set the upper and lower limits of the [AUTO] ISO sensitivity.
1Touch [ ].
2Touch icon.
: Zoom
: Aperture value
: Shutter speed
: Exposure Compensation
/ : ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB) (P185)
: Mic level adjustment
3Drag the slide bar to set.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
slowly
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
quickly
• With Creative Video Mode, you can set an ISO sensitivity value that falls in the range below.
– Value range: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] if [Extended ISO] is set)
– Upper limit of the [AUTO] ISO sensitivity: [6400] (When the [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] is set to [AUTO])
> [Motion Picture] > [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]
F
SS
ISO
GAIN
MENU
175
7. Recording Motion Pictures
In Creative Video Mode, you can use [Like709] in [Photo Style], which compresses
overexposed portions to enable recording with minimum saturation.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select the menu. (P55)
3Press 2/1 to select [Like709] and then press [Fn2].
4Press 2/1 to select the Knee Mode setting, and press [MENU/SET].
Recording with minimum white saturation by compressing
overexposed portions (Knee)
> [Motion Picture] > [Photo Style]
[AUTO] Adjusts the compression level of overexposed portions automatically.
[MANUAL]
Allows you to adjust the master knee point and master knee slope
manually.
Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1 to adjust.
[POINT] (master knee point), [SLOPE] (master knee slope)
• Rotate the front dial to adjust the master knee point, and rotate the rear
dial to adjust the master knee slope.
• Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Master knee point: 80 to 107
– Master knee slope: 0 to 99
[Off] s
[Photo Style] settings suitable for motion picture
In addition to [Like709], the effects of [Cinelike D] and [Cinelike V] in [Photo Style] are suitable
for motion picture.
• For details on [Photo Style], refer to P208.
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
176
You can set the frame rate for recording.
Slow motion pictures (overcrank recording)
Set a frame rate that provides more frames than the frame rate in [Rec Quality] does.
Example: If you set [FHD/8bit/100M/24p] to [48] and record a motion picture, a slow
motion effect of 1/2 can be gained.
Fast motion pictures (undercrank recording)
Set a frame rate that provides less frames than the frame rate in [Rec Quality] does.
Example: If you set [FHD/8bit/100M/24p] to [12] and record a motion picture, a quick
motion effect of 2k can be gained.
• Recording with a variable frame rate is possible with the following settings in [Rec Format] and
[Rec Quality].
Recording in Slow or Fast Motion ([Variable Frame Rate])
[Rec Format] [System Frequency] [Rec Quality]
[AVCHD]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] [FHD/24M/30p]
[FHD/24M/24p]
[50.00Hz (PAL)] [FHD/24M/25p]
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] s
[MP4] s
[MP4 (LPCM)]
[MOV]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p]
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/25p]
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[C4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p]
177
7. Recording Motion Pictures
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select an item that supports [Variable Frame Rate]. (P176)
• [MP4] does not support [Variable Frame Rate].
• Items available for recording with a [Variable Frame Rate] are indicated as [VFR available]
on the screen.
3Select the menu. (P55)
4Press 2/1 to select the frame rate you will record
the item with.
• You can select a value from [2] to [180] ([60] for [Rec
Quality] set to [4K], [48] for [Rec Quality] set to [C4K/8bit/
100M/24p]).
• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD], you cannot set a
frame rate with a number of frames greater than 60fps.
5Press [MENU/SET].
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format]
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Quality]
> [Creative Video] > [Variable Frame Rate] > [ON]
• Auto Focus does not work.
• Audio is not recorded when the frame rate is different from that of [Rec Quality].
• If you set a frame rate with a number of frames greater than 60fps, the picture quality may
deteriorate.
• If you assign [Variable Frame Rate] to [Fn Button Set] (P60) in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu and press the assinged function button, the frame rate setting screen will be displayed.
• When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you cannot set focus with Manual
Focus.
• To play back motion pictures recorded with [Variable Frame Rate] on an external device or to
export the motion pictures to it, you need a compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or a PC installed
with PHOTOfunSTUDIO.
• We recommend using a tripod.
• When you play back a motion picture recorded with [Variable Frame Rate], the recording time
display for motion pictures on the top right of the screen will look different from the one that
appears during normal motion picture playback.
[ ]: Actual playback time
[ ]: Actual elapse of time during which you recorded the motion picture
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When an image effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
MENU
MENU
XX
m
XX
s
XX
m
XX
s
7. Recording Motion Pictures
178
The camera moves focus from the current position to a pre-registered position.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select the menu. (P55)
3Press [ ].
4Press 3/4/2/1 to select the focus position and then press [MENU/SET].
5Set the focus position.
• This is the same operation as Manual Focus operation. (P101)
6Press [MENU/SET].
• To register focus positions to other items, repeat steps 2 through 4.
• Set the items below as needed.
7Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you press [DISP.], you can return to the setting screen.
8Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to
start recording.
• If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus
Transition will start when you start recording a motion
picture.
9Touch [POS 1], [POS 2], or [POS 3] to start Focus
Transition.
• The same operation can be performed by pressing 2/1 to
select the position and pressing [MENU/SET].
• The MF Guide will display the current focus position A and the registered focus position
B.
• Press [ ] to end Focus Transition.
10 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop recording.
Moving the focus position smoothly to a registered position ([Focus
Transition])
> [Creative Video] > [Focus Transition] > [Focus Pull Setting] >
[POS 1]/[POS 2]/[POS 3]
[Focus Transition Speed]
Sets the moving speed of focus.
[SH]/[H]/[M]/[L]/[SL]
• Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)
[Focus Transition Rec] Starts Focus Transition when recording starts.
[POS 1]/[POS 2]/[POS 3]/[OFF]
[Focus Transition Wait] Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
[10SEC]/[5SEC]/[OFF]
MENU
POS 2 POS 3POS 1
POS 1
179
7. Recording Motion Pictures
By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition,
you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a
fixed position.
• The motion picture size automatically changes to [FHD].
• Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.
1Set the mode dial to [ ].
2Select the menu. (P55)
3Set the cropping start frame.
ACropping start frame
• When making settings for the first time, a cropping start
frame of size 1920k1080 is displayed. (After setting the
cropping start frame and end frame, the start frame and
end frame that you set immediately before will be
displayed.)
• The camera will remember the frame position and size
even when the camera is turned off.
• Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings. To use them again, re-register
focus positions.
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Zoom operation
– Switching the Focus Mode
– Switching the Recording Mode
– Replacing the lens
• Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting the focus position.
• The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When [Color Bars] is set
Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a Fixed
Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping])
Pan Zoom in
> [Creative Video] > [4K Live Cropping] > [40SEC]/[20SEC]
MENU
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW 6HW
7. Recording Motion Pictures
180
4Repeat step 3, and then set the cropping end frame.
BCropping end frame
• The setting of the Auto Focus Mode switches to [š].
(The eye to be in focus is not indicated.)
5Press the motion picture button (or shutter button)
to start recording.
CElapsed recording time
DSet operating time
• Immediately release the motion picture button (or the
shutter button) after pressing it.
• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording
automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the motion picture button
(or the shutter button) again.
∫Changing the position and size of a crop frame
Press 2 while the recording screen is displayed, and perform steps 3 and 4.
∫To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording
Set [OFF] in step 2.
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1Touching Moves the frame.
Pinching out/in
Enlarges/reduces the frame.
(The range of settings allowed is from
1920k1080 to 3840k2160.)
[DISP.] [Reset] Returns the position of the frame to the centre
and its size to the default setting.
[MENU/SET] [Set] Decides the position and size of the frame.
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW 6HW
7
s
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
20
s
181
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫[Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] settings available for recording
[Rec Format] [System Frequency] [Rec Quality]
[AVCHD] s
[MP4]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] [FHD/28M/60p]
[FHD/20M/30p]
[50.00Hz (PAL)] [FHD/28M/50p]
[FHD/20M/25p]
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] s
[MP4 (LPCM)]
[MOV]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[FHD/8bit/100M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/24p]
[50.00Hz (PAL)] [FHD/8bit/100M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/100M/25p]
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [FHD/8bit/100M/24p]
• Brightness is measured and focus is done in the cropping start frame. During motion picture
recording, they are done in the crop frame. To lock the focus position, set [Continuous AF] to
[OFF], or set the Focus Mode to [MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (Multiple).
7. Recording Motion Pictures
182
Set the functions available only for Creative Video Mode.
Select the menu. (P55)
You can perform recording suited to an anamorphic lens. Motion pictures in 4K resolution
will be recorded with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
1Select the recording format that supports [Anamorphic(4:3)]. (P55)
• Recording with [AVCHD] or [MP4] is not possible.
2Select the recording quality.
[Creative Video] menu
> [Creative Video]
[Anamorphic(4:3)]
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format] > [MP4 (LPCM)]/[MOV]
> [Creative Video] > [Anamorphic(4:3)]
Item System
frequency Size Frame rate Bit rate YUV/bit Image
compression
[4K/A/150M/60p]
59.94Hz
(NTSC)
3328k2496 59.94p 150 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/A/100M/30p] 3328k2496 29.97p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/A/100M/24p] 3328k2496 23.98p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/A/150M/50p] 50.00Hz
(PAL)
3328k2496 50.00p 150 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/A/100M/25p] 3328k2496 25.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
[4K/A/100M/24p] 24.00Hz
(CINEMA) 3328k2496 24.00p 100 Mbps 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP
• When recording with [Anamorphic(4:3)], use an anamorphic lens that supports the 4:3 aspect
ratio. To convert the footage to a cinemascope aspect for playback, corresponding software
and device are required.
• Depending on the anamorphic lens used, problems such as vignetting or ghosting may occur.
We recommend that you record test motion pictures in advance.
• When using a lens compatible with the image stabiliser function, the image stabiliser function
may operate incorrectly. In this case, disable the image stabiliser function. (P144)
MENU
MENU
MENU
183
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Even when recording uses up the card’s free space, the camera continues the recording
by deleting the oldest segment of the recorded data.
• Only available when [Rec Format] is set to [MP4 (LPCM)] or [MOV] in Creative Video
Mode.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• While recording is in progress, the elapsed recording time is
indicated with [ ] (A) and the available recording time (B)
decreases.
• When recording uses up the card’s free space, the available
recording time display disappears and the camera continues the
recording while deleting the oldest segment of the recorded
data. A motion picture with a length equal to the available
recording time (the amount of time corresponding to the card's
free space) measured backwards from a point where the
recording ended will be saved.
• The camera divides up a motion picture into segments to overwrite data in a particular
segment. As a result, the displayed available recording time appears shorter than that
displayed during normal recording, and the actual recording time becomes longer than the
displayed available recording time.
[Loop Recording (video)]
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional).
• Up to 12 hours of continuous recording is possible.
• [Loop Recording (video)] is not possible when there is insufficient free space on the card.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
14
14m
57
57s
14m57s
3s3s
7. Recording Motion Pictures
184
Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.
• This function is available when [Exposure Mode] is set to either [S] or [M] in Creative
Video Mode.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select Shutter Speed with 2/1, and then press
[MENU/SET].
AShutter speed
• Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that
flickering and horizontal stripes will be minimised.
• If you press and hold 2/1, the shutter speed will be
adjusted faster.
• You can also adjust the shutter speed setting on the
recording screen in increments finer than the normal
adjustment method.
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Rotate the rear dial or front dial to adjust the setting.
• When not adjusting the setting, select [0].
3Press [MENU/SET].
[Synchro Scan]
> [Creative Video] > [Synchro Scan] > [ON]
• When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range becomes narrower.
[Master Pedestal Level]
j Side
This side creates a high
contrast image with a crisp
atmosphere.
n0 (Standard)
This is the standard setting.
i Side
This side creates a slightly
misty atmosphere.
> [Creative Video] > [Master Pedestal Level]
MENU
246.9246.9
MENU
101055
-
15
-
15
-
5
-
5
-
10
-
10 00 1515
MPL
MPLMPLMPL
MPLMPLMPLMPLMPLMPLMPL
+4
+4
185
7. Recording Motion Pictures
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity) values.
You can display wave forms on the recording screen.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Press 3/4/2/1 to select the display position, and press [MENU/SET].
• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
[SS/Gain Operation]
[SEC/ISO] Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.
[ANGLE/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.
• Available degree values (When [Synchro Scan] is set to [OFF]):
11 d to 360 d
[SEC/dB]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.
• Available gain (sensitivity) values:
AUTO or s6 dB to 30 dB (s12 dB to 30 dB when [Extended Gain Setting] is
set)
• 0 dB is equivalent to ISO 400.
• The names of the menu items below change as follows:
– [ISO Sensitivity (video)] > [Gain Setting]
– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] > [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]
– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] > [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]
– [Extended ISO] > [Extended Gain Setting]
[WFM/Vector Scope]
> [Creative Video] > [WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE] Displays waveforms as waves.
[VECTOR] Displays waveforms as vectors.
[OFF] s
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
186
Apply LUT (Look-Up Table) data to the recording screen image when [Photo Style] is set to
[V-Log L].
• This function becomes available only after being activated in [Activate] (P241) with an
upgrade software key (DMW-SFU1: optional).
• Only available when [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L].
∫Importing LUT files
• Supported LUT data format:
– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM 3DLUT
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– File names consisting of up to 8 alphanumeric characters (excluding extension)
Preparations:
• Save the LUT data in the card. Save it to the root directory (the first folder that appears when
you access the card on your computer) with the extension “.vlt”.
1Insert the card containing the LUT data into the card slot 1.
2Select the menu. (P55)
3Press 3/4 to select the LUT data you want to import, and press [MENU/SET].
4Press 3/4 to select the item to which you want to register the data, and press
[MENU/SET].
• Up to 4 pieces of LUT data can be registered.
• If you select an item containing registered data, it will be overwritten.
∫Selecting the LUT file to be used and enabling V-Log L View Assist
Select the menu. (P55)
[V-LogL View Assist]
> [Creative Video] > [V-LogL View Assist] > [Read LUT File]
> [Creative Video] > [V-LogL View Assist]
[LUT Select] Allows you to select the LUT data to be applied from among the preset
([Vlog_709]) and registered LUT data.
[LUT Monitor
Display]
Sets the monitor/viewfinder display setting of the camera to be applied when
[Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L].
• [ON]: Displays images using LUT data. [LUT] is displayed on the
recording screen.
• [OFF]: Displays [V-Log L] images. [V-LogL] is displayed on the recording
screen.
• To apply LUT data to an image output through HDMI, set [LUT HDMI Display] in [HDMI Rec
Output]. (P191)
• The effects of LUT data are not applied to motion pictures saved to the card.
MENU
MENU
187
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Pictures Using a Connected
External Device
You can connect the camera’s [HDMI] socket and an external monitor or recorder with an
HDMI cable. HDMI output is controlled separately for recording and playback. This section
describes the HDMI output control for recording.
• Playback signals are output using the [HDMI Mode (Play)] setting in [TV Connection] of the
[Setup] menu. (P239)
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
∫Attaching the cable holder
Attach the cable holder to prevent the HDMI cable or USB connection cable from getting
disconnected by accident or the [HDMI] or USB socket from being damaged.
• Example: Attaching to an HDMI cable
1While pushing A (1), slide the clamp
portion of the cable holder to remove it
(2).
2After placing the camera on a stable
surface, loosely mount the cable holder
to the mount on the camera (3), and
secure the cable holder by rotating the
screws in the direction of the arrows (4,
5).
3Attach the HDMI cable to the clamp
portion (6).
4Slide the clamp portion to attach it to
the cable holder (7).
External monitor/recorder (HDMI output during recording)
A[HDMI] socket (Type A)
BHDMI cable
CExternal recorder
DExternal monitor
7. Recording Motion Pictures
188
5Connect the HDMI cable to the [HDMI]
socket (8).
BLeave some slack so that this section has
a length of at least 10 cm (0.33 feet).
• You can also connect the HDMI cable and
USB connection cable at the same time
when the cable holder is attached.
Removing the cable holder
To remove the cable holder, follow the steps for attaching it in the reverse order.
∫Notes on images output via HDMI (sorted by Recording Mode)
• When [Rec Area] is set to [ ] in a mode except Creative Video Mode, the output setting of
aspect ratio, size, and frame rate are determined by the [Rec Quality] setting in the [Motion
Picture] menu. The output bit value is 8 bit.
• When recording motion pictures, the output method changes to a setup equivalent to the one
used in Creative Video Mode.
• It may take some time for the output method to change.
• We recommend using an HDMI cable with a maximum thickness diameter of 6 mm
(0.24 inch).
• Keep the clamp portion of the cable holder out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Recording
Mode
Aspect ratio
The output setting is determined by the
[Rec Quality] setting in the [Motion
Picture] menu.
• When [Anamorphic(4:3)] is set, black
bars appear on both sides of output
images.
The output setting is determined by the
[Aspect Ratio] setting in the [Rec]
menu.
• Black bars appear on both sides of
images, except for those with an
aspect ratio of [16:9].
Size/frame
rate
The output setting is determined by the
[Rec Quality] setting and the [Down
Convert] setting for [HDMI Rec
Output], both located in the [Motion
Picture] menu.
The output setting is determined by the
connected device.
Output bit
value
The output setting is determined by the
[Rec Quality] setting in the [Motion
Picture] menu.
• If [10bit] is not supported by the
connected device, the setting
changes to 8 bit.
• You can set the output bit value when
using a 4K/60p (4K/50p) setting.
The output setting is determined by the
connected device.
189
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫Setting the output bit value for 4K/60p (4K/50p)
Settings: [4:2:2 10bit]/[4:2:0 8bit]
• Motion pictures cannot be recorded to the card at [4:2:2 10bit] during HDMI output.
• This item works only when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/8bit/150M/60p] or [4K/8bit/150M/50p] in
Creative Video Mode.
∫Setting the picture quality (size/frame rate) for HDMI output
Down-convert the size/frame rate when the motion picture size is set to [4K] or [C4K] in
[Rec Quality].
• When [Down Convert] is operating, focusing with Auto Focus may take longer than usual and
the tracking performance of continuous focusing may slow down.
∫Sizes and frame rates for HDMI output when using Creative Video Mode (during
motion picture recording)
The settings of [Down Convert] and [Rec Quality] determine the size and frame rate for
HDMI output as below.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)]:
¢1 Output at 1080/59.94p if the connected device does not support the value.
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] >
[4K/60p Bit Mode] ([4K/50p Bit Mode])
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] > [Down Convert]
[AUTO] Down-converts the size/frame rate setting of images to that of the connected
device to output them.
[4K/30p]
([4K/25p])
Down-converts the size/frame rate setting of images from [4K/60p]/[4K/50p] to
[4K/30p]/[4K/25p] to output them.
[1080p] Down-converts the size setting to [1080] and outputs images in progressive
format.
[1080i] Down-converts the size setting to [1080] and outputs images in interlace format.
[OFF] Outputs images at a size/frame rate set in [Rec Quality].
[Down
Convert]
Size/frame rate in [Rec Quality]
C4K/
23.98p 4K/59.94p 4K/29.97p 4K/23.98p 1080/
59.94p
1080/
29.97p
1080/
59.94i
1080/
23.98p
[AUTO] The output setting is determined by the connected device.
[4K/30p] — 4K/29.97p 4K/29.97p — — — — —
[1080p] 1080/
23.98p
1080/
59.94p
1080/
29.97p¢1
1080/
23.98p
1080/
59.94p
1080/
29.97p¢1—1080/
23.98p
[1080i] —1080/
59.94i
1080/
59.94i —1080/
59.94i
1080/
59.94i
1080/
59.94i —
[OFF] C4K/
23.98p 4K/59.94p 4K/29.97p 4K/23.98p 1080/
59.94p
1080/
29.97p
1080/
59.94i
1080/
23.98p
MENU
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
190
• When [System Frequency] is set to [50.00Hz (PAL)]:
¢2 Output at 1080/50.00p if the connected device does not support the value.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
∫Setting the information displayed during HDMI output
Shows or hides the displays of information.
• Waveforms in [WFM/Vector Scope] cannot be output to HDMI devices.
∫Outputting control information to an external recorder
Set whether or not to output control information for recording start/stop to external devices
connected to the HDMI socket.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• [HDMI Recording Control] can only be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] (P169) is set to
[ON] in Creative Video Mode.
• Control information can be output only when outputting a time code to video from the HDMI
output during recording.
• Control information is output when pressing the motion picture button or shutter button, even if
the motion picture cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into this unit).
• Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
[Down
Convert]
Size/frame rate in [Rec Quality]
4K/50.00p 4K/25.00p 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p 1080/50.00i
[AUTO] The output setting is determined by the connected device.
[4K/25p] 4K/25.00p 4K/25.00p — — —
[1080p] 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p¢21080/50.00p 1080/25.00p¢2—
[1080i] 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i
[OFF] 4K/50.00p 4K/25.00p 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p 1080/50.00i
[Down
Convert]
Size/frame rate in [Rec Quality]
C4K/24.00p 4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p
[AUTO] The output setting is determined by the connected device.
[1080p] 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p
[OFF] C4K/24.00p 4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] > [Info Display]
[ON] Outputs the displays on the camera as they are.
[OFF] Outputs only the image.
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] > [HDMI Recording Control]
MENU
MENU
191
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫Applying LUT data to images that are output to an HDMI device
Apply LUT (Look-Up Table) data to images that are output to an HDMI device when [Photo
Style] is set to [V-Log L].
• This function becomes available only after being activated in [Activate] (P241) with an
upgrade software key (DMW-SFU1: optional).
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• This item is available only when [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L] in Creative Video Mode.
• You can set the LUT data to be applied in [V-LogL View Assist]. (P186)
∫Outputting down-converted audio to an HDMI device
When an XLR microphone adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is attached, audio is
down-converted to a format suitable for the connected HDMI device before being output.
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
• This item is available only when using an XLR microphone adaptor.
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] > [LUT HDMI Display]
> [Motion Picture] > [HDMI Rec Output] > [Sound Down Convert]
• When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a time lag.
• Electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
• When you check the image and sound from the TV connected to the camera, the microphone
of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV, producing an abnormal
sound (audio feedback). If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the
volume on the TV.
• Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
• HDMI output cannot be used in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
192
Using a stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or stereo microphone
(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record sounds with quality superior to those recorded with
the built-in microphone.
Using the stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you can switch between the
gun (ultra-directional) recording and the wide range stereo recording.
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
AHot shoe
B[MIC] socket
CStereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional)
Stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional)
Preparations:
• Turn this unit off.
• When attaching the stereo shotgun microphone to the camera, remove the hot shoe cover.
(P153)
∫Setting the range within which the stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2:
optional) will record sounds
1Attach the dedicated stereo shotgun microphone to this unit, and then turn this
unit on.
2Select the menu. (P55)
• This item is available only when using a stereo shotgun microphone.
3(When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press 2/1 to select a range, and press [MENU/SET].
External Microphone (optional)
> [Motion Picture] > [Special Mic.]
[STEREO] Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO] Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according
to the angle of view of the lens.
[SHOTGUN] Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and
surrounding noise.
[S.SHOTGUN] Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of
[SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL] Allows recording within the range you set manually.
MENU
193
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫Reducing the wind noise when using an external microphone
The camera will effectively reduce the wind noise when recording sound with an external
microphone.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• This item is available only when using an external microphone.
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
>[Motion Picture] > [Wind Cut]
• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is connected, [Mic Level Disp.] (P170) is automatically set to
[ON], and the mic level is displayed on the screen.
• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not hold only the external
microphone to prevent the camera from falling.
• If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.
• When a stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is used, [Special Mic.] is fixed to
[STEREO].
• When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [S.SHOTGUN] or [MANUAL], [Sound Output] in
the [Motion Picture] menu is fixed to [REC SOUND].
• If you press the function button to which [Mic. Directivity Adjust] in [Fn Button Set] (P60) in the
[Custom] ([Operation]) menu is assigned when [Special Mic.] is set to [MANUAL], the screen
that lets you set the range will be displayed.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the external microphone.
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
194
By attaching an XLR microphone adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) to the camera, you can
use a commercially-available XLR microphone to enable the recording of superior-quality
high-res/stereo sound.
Preparations:
• Turn this unit off.
• Remove the hot shoe cover that is attached to the camera. (P153)
∫Setting the sampling frequency
1Attach the XLR microphone adaptor to the hot shoe of this unit, and then turn
this unit on.
2Select the menu. (P55)
• This item is available only when using an XLR microphone adaptor.
• The set sampling frequency is also applied to the sound output via HDMI. With [Sound
Down Convert] in [HDMI Rec Output], you can down-convert the sound output via HDMI.
(P191)
XLR Microphone Adaptor (optional)
AHot shoe BXLR microphone adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)
CCommercially available XLR microphone
> [Motion Picture] > [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
[96kHz/24bit] Records high-res sound at
96 kHz/24bit. Only available when [Rec
Format] is set to [MOV].
[48kHz/24bit] Records high-quality sound at
48 kHz/24bit.
[48kHz/16bit] Records standard-quality sound at 48 kHz/16bit.
[OFF] Records sound using the built-in microphone.
• The items below are fixed to the following settings when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set.
– [Mic Level Adj.]: [OFF]
– [Mic Level Limiter]: [OFF]
– [Lens Noise Cut]: [OFF]
– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]
• The following menu items are disabled when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set.
–[Wind Cut] – [Special Mic.]
• When the XLR microphone adaptor is connected, [Mic Level Disp.] (P170) is automatically set
to [ON].
• When a XLR microphone adaptor is attached to the camera, do not hold only the XLR
microphone adaptor to prevent the camera from falling.
• If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the XLR microphone adaptor.
MENU
195
7. Recording Motion Pictures
You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by
connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.
AHeadphone socket
BCommercially available headphone
• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
• When headphones are connected, electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
∫Switch the sound output method
• The sound level you set in [Mic Level Adj.] is displayed as a mic level.
• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to [REC SOUND].
∫Adjusting the headphone volume
Connect headphones, and rotate the control dial while the recording screen is
displayed or a motion picture is being played back.
• You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ] or [ ] during playback.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
Headphone
>[Motion Picture] > [Sound Output]
[REALTIME] Actual sound without time lag.
It may be different to the audio recorded in the motion picture.
[REC SOUND] Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures.
The audio may be output slower than the actual audio.
: Reduce volume level : Increase volume level
> [Setup] > [Headphone Volume]
MENU
MENU
196
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures
1Press [(].
2Press 2/1.
ACard slot
• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the
pictures in succession.
• Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating the control dial or dragging the
screen horizontally. (P52)
• You can forward or rewind pictures continuously by keeping your finger on the left or
right sides of the screen after forwarding/rewinding a picture.
• You can switch the card selected for playback by forwarding/rewinding pictures
continuously.
∫To finish playback
Press [(] again or press the shutter button halfway.
2: Play back the previous picture
1: Play back the next picture
Switching the card selected for playback instantly
You can switch the card selected for playback instantly by assigning [Slot Change] to a
function button. (P63)
Sending an image to a web service
If you press 4 when displaying images one by one, you can easily send an image to a
web service. (P294)
Not available in these cases:
• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system”
established by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association”
and with Exif “Exchangeable Image File Format”.
This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
197
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Motion Pictures
This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD, MP4 and MOV formats.
• Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon
([ ]).
Press 3 to play back.
AMotion picture recording time
• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on
the screen.
For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as
[8m30s].
• Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in
[AVCHD].
• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures.
∫Operations during Motion Picture Playback
¢1 The fast forward/rewind speed increases if you press 1/2 again.
¢2 When a motion picture recorded with [AVCHD] is rewound frame-by-frame, its frames will be
shown in intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3Play/Pause 4Stop
2
Fast rewind¢1
1
Fast forward¢1
Frame-by-frame
rewind
(while pausing)¢2
Frame-by-frame
forward
(while pausing)
Reduce volume level Increase volume
level
• You can play back motion pictures on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311).
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
(P240)
12s12s
12s
12s
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
198
You can save a scene of a motion picture as a picture.
1Press 3 to pause motion picture playback.
• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing 2/1 while the motion picture
is paused.
2Press [MENU/SET].
• The same operation can be performed by touching
[].
Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture
• Still pictures will be saved with [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9] and [Quality] set to [A]. The
number of pixels will differ according to the motion picture you play back.
– When the motion picture size is set to [C4K] in [Rec Quality]: 4096k2160 (9 M)
– When the motion picture size is set to [4K] in [Rec Quality]: [M] (8 M)
– When the motion picture size is set to [FHD] in [Rec Quality]: [S] (2 M)
• Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality.
• [ ] is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures.
• To create still pictures from motion pictures when the camera is connected to a TV with an
HDMI cable, set [VIERA Link] in [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].
199
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Switching the Playback Method
Using the Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear dial right.
1k2k4k8k16k
• If the rear dial is rotated to the left after the image is enlarged, the
magnification will be reduced.
• You can also enlarge/reduce the image by pinching out/pinching
in (P52) on the part you want to enlarge/reduce.
• You can move the enlarged part by pressing 3/4/2/1 or
dragging the screen. (P52)
• You can also enlarge (2k) the image by double-touching the part
you want to enlarge. If you double-touch the enlarged image, the
magnification is reset to 1k.
• You can forward or rewind the image while maintaining the same
zoom magnification and zoom position for the Playback Zoom by
rotating the control dial during Playback Zoom.
2.0X2.0X
2.0X
2.0X
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
200
Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback)
Rotate the rear dial left.
1 screen 12 screens 30 screens Calendar screen
display
ACard slot
• Playback is performed separately by card slot. You can switch
the card selected for playback by pressing [Fn3].
• If the rear dial is rotated to the right, the previous playback
screen will be displayed.
• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the
following icons.
– [ ]: 1 screen
– [ ]: 12 screens
– [ ]: 30 screens
– [ ]: Calendar screen display
• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up or down.
• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.
∫To return to Normal Playback
Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select a motion picture, it will be played back automatically.
Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback)
1Rotate the rear dial left to display the Calendar screen.
2Press 3/4/2/1 to select the recording date and
press [MENU/SET].
• Only the images recorded on that date will be displayed.
• Rotate the rear dial left to return to the Calendar screen
display.
3Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
• Playback is performed separately by card slot. You cannot switch the card selected for
playback while the Calendar is displayed.
• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the Calendar screen is first displayed.
• You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.
• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as the 1st January, 2017.
• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [World Time], the pictures are
displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.
CAL
1/98
Fn3
9876543
16151413121110
23222120191817
30292827262524
31
21
SUN SATFRITHUWENTUEMON
2017
12
201
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Group Pictures
A picture group consists of multiple pictures. You can play back pictures in a group either
continuously or one by one.
• You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once.
(For example, if you delete a picture group, all pictures in the group are deleted.)
Press 3.
• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],
[]).
• When playing back group pictures one at a time, options are displayed.
After selecting [Burst Play] (or [Sequential Play]), select either of the following playback
methods:
[From the first picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group.
[From the current picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back.
∫Operations during Group Pictures playback
[]:
A picture group saved at once with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving]. (P123)
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken with Focus
Bracket. (P141)
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse
Shot. (P134)
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop
Motion Animation. (P136)
• Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock.
Continuously playing back Group Pictures
3Continuous playback/Pause 4Stop
2
Fast rewind
1
Fast forward
Rewind
(while pausing)
Forward
(while pausing)
1/981/981/981/98

SLF
SLF
SLF
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
202
1Press 4.
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ].
2Press 2/1 to flip through images.
• Pressing 4 again or touching [ ] will return you to the normal playback screen.
• Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played
back. (Such as Multi Playback, Playback Zoom and deleting images)
Playing back group pictures one by one
1/981/98
1/98
1/98

SLF

SLF

SLF
203
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Deleting Pictures
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
1In Playback Mode, select the picture to delete
and then press [ ].
• The same operation can be performed by touching
[].
2Press 3 to select [Delete Single] and then press [MENU/SET].
• Picture groups are treated as a single picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture group will
be deleted.)
• You can only delete images on one card at a time.
1In Playback Mode, press [ ].
2Press 3/4 to select [Delete Multi] or [Delete All] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• If you select [Delete All], all the pictures on the card of the displayed icon will be deleted.
• After selecting [Delete All], if you select [Delete All Non-rating], you can delete all
pictures except for those with ratings.
3(When [Delete Multi] is selected)
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and
then press [MENU/SET] to set. (Repeat this
step.)
•[‚] appears on the selected pictures.
If [MENU/SET] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can switch the displayed card by
pressing [Fn3].
4(When [Delete Multi] is selected)
Press [DISP.] to execute.
To delete a single picture
To delete multiple pictures (up to 100) or all the pictures
• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.
ョㄏフ
ュリヴヱハ
Fn3
2.
204
9. Using Menu Functions
Menu list
You can change the settings registered to custom sets ( ). (P85)
Menus that are only available for
particular Recording Modes P204
A
The following menus are displayed only for their
corresponding Recording Modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
– [Creative Video]
– [Custom Mode]
– [Creative Control]
[Rec] P205
B
[Motion Picture] P221
[Custom] P223
[Setup] P235
[My Menu] P245
[Playback] P246
Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes
:[Intelligent Auto] menu
• [Intelligent Auto Mode] (P66)
• [iHandheld Night Shot] (P68)
• [iHDR] (P68)
:[Creative Video] menu
• [Exposure Mode] (P173)
• [Variable Frame Rate] (P176)
• [Anamorphic(4:3)] (P182)
• [Loop Recording (video)] (P183)
• [Synchro Scan] (P184)
• [Master Pedestal Level] (P184)
• [SS/Gain Operation] (P185)
• [WFM/Vector Scope] (P185)
• [V-LogL View Assist] (P186)
• [Focus Transition] (P178)
• [4K Live Cropping] (P179)
:[Custom Mode] menu
205
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback
method.
:[Creative Control] menu
• [Filter Effect] (P78) • [Simultaneous record w/o filter] (P78)
:[Rec] menu
• [Aspect Ratio] (P205)
•[Picture Size] (P206)
• [Quality] (P207)
• [AFS/AFF] (P88)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (P89)
• [Photo Style] (P208)
• [Filter Settings] (P210)
• [Color Space] (P211)
• [Metering Mode] (P212)
• [Highlight Shadow] (P212)
• [i.Dynamic] (P213)
• [i.Resolution] (P213)
• [Flash] (P156)
• [Red-Eye Removal] (P214)
• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (P214)
• [Min. Shtr Speed] (P214)
• [Long Shtr NR] (P215)
• [Shading Comp.] (P215)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P216)
• [Stabilizer] (P143)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P148)
• [Digital Zoom] (P150)
• [Burst Rate] (P113)
• [6K/4K PHOTO] (P116)
• [Post Focus] (P128)
• [Self Timer] (P133)
• [Time Lapse/Animation] (P134, 136)
• [Silent Mode] (P216)
• [Shutter Type] (P217)
• [Shutter Delay] (P218)
• [Bracket] (P139)
• [HDR] (P219)
•[Multi Exp.] (P220)
• [Time Stamp Rec] (P171)
[Aspect Ratio]
> [Rec] > [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] [Aspect Ratio] of a 4:3 TV
[3:2] [Aspect Ratio] of a 35 mm film camera
[16:9] [Aspect Ratio] of a high-definition TV, etc.
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
• In the following case, [16:9], [1:1] does not work:
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (only when [6K 18M] is set)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
206
Applicable modes:
Set the number of pixels.
The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when
they are printed onto large sheets.
[Picture Size]
> [Rec] > [Picture Size]
When the aspect ratio is [4:3]. When the aspect ratio is [3:2].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (20M) 5184k3888 [L] (17M) 5184k3456
[M] (10M) 3712k2784 [M] (9M) 3712k2480
[S] (5M) 2624k1968 [S] (4.5M) 2624k1752
When the aspect ratio is [16:9]. When the aspect ratio is [1:1].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (14.5M) 5184k2920 [L] (14.5M) 3888k3888
[M] (8M) 3840k2160 [M] (7.5M) 2784k2784
[S] (2M) 1920k1080 [S] (3.5M) 1968k1968
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P148) is set, [ ] is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio
except for [L].
• [Picture Size] cannot be set when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function.
MENU
207
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[Quality]
> [Rec] > [Quality]
Settings File format Description of settings
[A]
JPEG
A JPEG image in which image quality was given priority.
[›]
A standard image quality JPEG image.
This is useful for increasing the number of shots without
changing the number of pixels.
[]RAWiJPEG You can record a RAW image and a JPEG image ([A] or
[›]) simultaneously.
[]
[] RAW You can only record RAW images.
About RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed. Playback
and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated software.
• You can process RAW images in [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu. (P252)
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” (P312) by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to process
and edit RAW files on a PC.
• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [ ] or [ ], both the RAW and JPEG
images will be deleted simultaneously.
• When you play back an image recorded with [ ], grey areas corresponding to the aspect
ratio at the time of recording are displayed.
• The setting is fixed to [A] when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function.
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
208
Applicable modes:
You can select effects to match the type of image you wish to record.
It is possible to adjust the items such as colour or picture quality of the effect to your
desire.
¢1 These can be set only in Creative Video Mode.
¢2 Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high-definition broadcasting.
[Photo Style]
> [Rec] > [Photo Style]
[Standard] This is the standard setting.
[Vivid] Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
[Natural] Soft effect with low contrast.
[Monochrome] Monochrome effect with no colour shades.
[L.Monochrome] Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black
accents.
[Scenery] An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and
greens.
[Portrait] An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful
skin tone.
[Custom1]
Use the setting registered in advance.
[Custom2]
[Custom3]
[Custom 4]
[Cinelike D] Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve
designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
[Cinelike V] Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed
to create film-like images.
[Like709]¢1
Allows you to minimise white saturation by applying a gamma
curve correction equivalent to Rec.709¢2 to compress
overexposed portions (Knee).
[V-Log L]¢1
A gamma curve effect designed for post production editing. It
allows you to add rich gradation to images during post
production editing.
• This function becomes available after you enable it in
[Activate] (P241) using an Upgrade Software Key
(DMW-SFU1: optional).
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode:
– Only [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another Recording
Mode or this unit is turned off.
– Picture quality cannot be adjusted.
MENU
209
9. Using Menu Functions
∫Adjusting the picture quality
1Press 2/1 to select the type of Photo Style.
2Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1
to adjust.
¢1It cannot be adjusted when [Like709] is set.
¢2It cannot be adjusted when [V-Log L] is set.
¢3[Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome] is selected. In
other cases, [Saturation] will be displayed.
¢4[Filter Effect] is displayed only when [Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome] is selected. In
other cases, [Hue] will be displayed.
• If you adjust the picture quality, [_] is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen.
3Press [MENU/SET].
[Contrast]¢1,2
[r]Increases the difference between the brightness and
the darkness in the picture.
[s]Decreases the difference between the brightness
and the darkness in the picture.
[Sharpness] [r]The picture is sharply defined.
[s]The picture is softly focused.
[Noise Reduction]
[r]The noise reduction effect is enhanced.
Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly.
[s]The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain
pictures with higher resolution.
[Saturation]¢2,3 [r]The colours in the picture become vivid.
[s]The colours in the picture become natural.
[Color Tone]¢3[r]Adds a bluish tone.
[s]Adds a yellowish tone.
[Hue]¢2,4
[r]
Adjusts the colour tone of the entire image. If you
see red as a reference point, this shifts the hue
closer to violet/magenta.
[s]
Adjusts the colour tone of the entire image. If you
see red as a reference point, this shifts the hue
closer to yellow/green.
[Filter Effect]¢4
[Yellow] Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Weak)
The blue sky can be recorded clearly.
[Orange]
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect:
Medium)
The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue.
[Red] Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Strong)
The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue.
[Green] The skin and lips of people appear in natural tones.
Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced.
[Off] —
DISP.カスタム登録
-5
-500+5+5
±0
±0
S
±0
±0
±0
6WDQGDUG
S
9. Using Menu Functions
210
∫Registering settings to [Custom1] to [Custom 4]
1Adjust the picture quality following step 2 of “Adjusting the picture quality”,
and then press [DISP.].
2Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and
press [MENU/SET].
Applicable modes:
You can apply the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode in a mode such as
Aperture-Priority AE Mode. (P78)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫Change the settings by using the touch screen
1Touch [ ].
2Touch the item you want to set.
• You can select the Knee Mode setting when [Like709] is set. For details, refer to P175.
[Filter Settings]
> [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Filter Effect]
[]:Image effect ON/OFF
[]:Selects an image effect (filter)
[]:Adjusts an image effect
• [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] are not
available in the following cases.
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording motion pictures
• The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [ISO 3200]. The ISO sensitivity for
[High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions not available in
Creative Control Mode.
For example, White Balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be set to [Œ] (forced flash
off).
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Filter Settings] does not work:
– When using [4K Live Cropping]
MENU
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
211
9. Using Menu Functions
∫Taking a picture with and without an image effect simultaneously
([Simultaneous record w/o filter])
You can press the shutter button once and take two pictures simultaneously, one with an
image effect and the other one without it.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Set this when you want to correct the colour reproduction of the recorded pictures on a
PC, printer etc.
> [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Simultaneous record w/o filter]
• A picture with an image effect will be taken first, followed by a picture without it.
• Only an image with an image effect is displayed for Auto Review.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Simultaneous record w/o filter] does not work:
– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture (only when set to [ ] ([Video
Priority]))
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
[Color Space]
> [Rec] > [Color Space]
[sRGB] Colour space is set to sRGB colour space.
This is widely used in computer related equipment.
[AdobeRGB]
Colour space is set to AdobeRGB colour space.
AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional
printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colours than sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
212
Applicable modes:
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
Applicable modes:
You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark portions on an image while checking the
brightness on the screen.
1Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of
bright/dark portions.
ABright portion
BDark portion
• The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front
dial is for adjusting bright areas.
• To register a preferred setting, press 3, and select the
destination where the custom setting will be registered to
([Custom1] ( )/[Custom2] ( )/[Custom3] ( )).
• Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
2Press [MENU/SET].
[Metering Mode]
> [Rec] > [Metering Mode]
[]
(Multiple)
This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable
exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen
automatically.
Usually, we recommend using this method.
[]
(Centre weighted)
This is the method used to focus on the subject on the centre of the
screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
[]
(Spot)
This is the method to measure the subject in the spot
metering target A.
• If you set the spot metering target on the edge of the
screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness
around the location.
[Highlight Shadow]
>[Rec] > [Highlight Shadow]
(Standard) A state with no adjustments is set.
(Raise the contrast) Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
(Lower the contrast) Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
(Brighten dark areas) Dark areas are brightened.
// (Custom) Registered custom settings can be applied.
MENU
MENU
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
213
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the
background and subject is great, etc.
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution
Technology.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default
setting.
• When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ ] (Standard).
[i.Dynamic]
> [Rec] > [i.Dynamic]
Not available in these cases:
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• [i.Dynamic] does not work when [HDR] is set.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L]
[i.Resolution]
> [Rec] > [i.Resolution]
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
214
Applicable modes:
When Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ]) is selected, Red-Eye Removal is performed
whenever the flash is used. The camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects the
picture.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
Applicable modes:
Set the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
Settings: [AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]
[Red-Eye Removal]
> [Rec] > [Red-Eye Removal]
• [ ] is displayed on the icon when it is set to [ON].
• Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected.
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
> [Rec] > [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/
[25600]
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
[Min. Shtr Speed]
> [Rec] > [Min. Shtr Speed]
• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in situations where proper exposure
cannot be obtained.
MENU
MENU
MENU
215
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes
slower to take pictures of night scenery etc. so you can take beautiful pictures.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record
pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Long Shtr NR]
> [Rec] > [Long Shtr NR]
• [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for
signal processing.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using the electronic shutter
[Shading Comp.]
> [Rec] > [Shading Comp.]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
Not available in these cases:
• Correction is not possible in the following cases:
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [Variable Frame Rate] is set
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
216
Applicable modes:
The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when
the aperture is closed.
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Disables operational sounds and output of light at once.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.
The following settings are fixed.
– [Flash Mode]: [Œ] (forced flash off)
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
– [Beep Volume]: [s] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
[Diffraction Compensation]
> [Rec] > [Diffraction Compensation]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
[Silent Mode]
> [Rec] > [Silent Mode]
• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light up/flash.
– Status indicator
– Self-timer indicator
– WIRELESS connection lamp
• Sounds that are produced by the camera regardless of your operations, such as the lens
aperture sound, cannot be muted.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
MENU
MENU
217
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Select the shutter to be used for taking pictures.
¢1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode. (P74)
¢2 Up to an ISO sensitivity of [ISO3200]. When the setting is higher than [ISO3200], the shutter
speed will be faster than 1 second.
¢3 Electronic shutter sound settings can be changed in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone].
(P237)
• Compared to Mechanical Shutter Mode, Electronic Front Curtain Mode produces less
shutter-induced shake, so it can minimise the influence of shutter vibration.
• Electronic Shutter Mode allows you to take pictures without causing shutter vibration.
[Shutter Type]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Type]
[AUTO] Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition
and shutter speed.
[MSHTR] Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
[EFC] Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
[ESHTR] Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Mechanical shutter Electronic Front
Curtain Electronic Shutter
Description
The camera starts and
ends an exposure with
the mechanical shutter.
The camera starts an
exposure electronically,
and ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
The camera starts and
ends an exposure
electronically.
Flash ±±—
Shutter Speed
(Sec.) B (Bulb)¢1/60 to 1/8000th B (Bulb)¢1/60 to 1/2000th 1¢2 to 1/16000th
Shutter sound Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound¢3
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When a moving subject is recorded with the electronic shutter, the subject may appear
distorted on the picture.
• When the electronic shutter is used under fluorescent or LED lighting, etc., horizontal
stripes may appear on the picture. In such cases, lowering the shutter speed may
reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes. (P73)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
218
Applicable modes:
To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the
specified time has passed.
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
[Shutter Delay]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Delay]
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
MENU
219
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich
gradation.
You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,
the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫Changing settings
[HDR]
> [Rec] > [HDR]
[Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]: Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the
differences between the bright and dark areas.
[n1EV]/[n2EV]/[n3EV]:
Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure
parameters.
[Auto Align]
[ON]: Automatically corrects camera shake (jitter) and other
problems that can cause the images to misalign.
Recommended for use during hand-held shooting.
[OFF]: Image misalignment not adjusted.
Recommended when a tripod is used.
• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
• The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when [Auto Align] is set to [ON].
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
Not available in these cases:
• [HDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
220
Applicable modes:
Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times equivalent per a single image)
1Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
2Decide on the composition, and take the first
picture.
• After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway
down to take the next picture.
• Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]
for one of the following operations.
3Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures.
• If [Fn4] is pressed while taking pictures, the photographed images are recorded, and the
multiple exposure picture-taking session will be completed.
4Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish.
∫Changing settings
[Multi Exp.]
> [Rec] > [Multi Exp.]
– [Next]: Advance to the next picture.
– [Retake]: Return to the first picture.
– [Exit]: Record the image of the first picture, and
finish the multiple exposure picture-taking
session.
[Auto Gain] If you select [OFF], all exposure results are superimposed as they are.
Compensate the exposure as necessary, depending on the subject.
[Overlay]
If you select [ON], you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded
images. After [Start] is selected, images on the card will be displayed.
Select a RAW image, and press [MENU/SET] to proceed to recording.
• The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the
recording information for the last picture taken.
• Items shown in grey on the menu screen cannot be set during multiple exposures.
• [Overlay] is available only for RAW images taken with this unit.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
MENU
([LW
5HWDNH
1H[W
([LW
5HWDNH
221
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Select the luminance range to match the use of video.
Settings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
• If you set [Rec Quality] to a 10bit motion picture setting, the available options change to
[0-1023], [64-940], and [64-1023].
• This function works only for motion pictures. Still pictures (including those you take during
motion picture recording) will be taken with [0-255].
• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4], [0-255] in [Luminance Level] will switch to
[16-255].
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [0-255].
Applicable modes:
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.
Settings: [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]
: [Motion Picture] menu
• [Rec Format] (P163)
• [Rec Quality] (P163)
• [Time Code] (P169)
• [AFS/AFF] (P88)
• [Continuous AF] (P167)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (P167)
• [Photo Style] (P208)
• [Filter Settings] (P210)
• [Luminance Level] (P221)
• [Metering Mode] (P212)
• [Highlight Shadow] (P212)
• [i.Dynamic] (P213)
• [i.Resolution] (P213)
• [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (P174)
• [Shading Comp.] (P215)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P216)
• [Stabilizer] (P143)
• [Flkr Decrease] (P221)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P148)
• [Digital Zoom] (P150)
• [Picture Mode in Rec.] (P168)
• [Time Stamp Rec] (P171)
• [Mic Level Disp.] (P170)
• [Mic Level Adj.] (P170)
• [Mic Level Limiter] (P170)
• [Wind Noise Canceller] (P222)
• [Wind Cut] (P193)
• [Lens Noise Cut] (P222)
• [Special Mic.] (P192)
• [Sound Output] (P195)
• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (P194)
• [HDMI Rec Output] (P187)
• [Color Bars] (P172)
[Luminance Level]
> [Motion Picture] > [Luminance Level]
[Flkr Decrease]
> [Motion Picture] > [Flkr Decrease]
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
222
Applicable modes:
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[OFF]
• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimising the low-pitched sound when a strong
wind is detected.
• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound quality.
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
Applicable modes:
You can reduce the zoom sound of an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom
that is produced during motion picture recording.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used.
• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal operation.
[Wind Noise Canceller]
> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Noise Canceller]
[Lens Noise Cut]
>[Motion Picture] > [Lens Noise Cut]
MENU
MENU
223
9. Using Menu Functions
: [Custom] menu
[Exposure]
• [ISO Increments] (P224)
• [Extended ISO] (P224)
• [Exposure Comp. Reset] (P224)
[Focus / Release Shutter]
• [AF/AE Lock] (P104)
• [AF/AE Lock Hold] (P224)
• [Shutter AF] (P224)
• [Half Press Release] (P224)
• [Quick AF] (P225)
• [Eye Sensor AF] (P225)
• [Pinpoint AF Setting] (P225)
• [AF Assist Lamp] (P225)
• [Focus/Release Priority] (P226)
• [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (P95)
•[AF+MF] (P226)
• [MF Assist] (P226)
• [MF Assist Display] (P226)
[Operation]
• [Fn Button Set] (P60)
• [Q.MENU] (P227)
• [Dial Set.] (P47)
• [Joystick Setting] (P48)
• [Operation Lock Setting] (P227)
• [Video Button] (P227)
• [Touch Settings] (P227)
[Monitor / Display]
• [Auto Review] (P228)
• [Monochrome Live View] (P228)
• [Constant Preview] (P228)
• [Peaking] (P228)
• [Histogram] (P229)
• [Guide Line] (P229)
• [Center Marker] (P229)
• [Highlight] (P229)
• [Zebra Pattern] (P230)
• [Expo.Meter] (P230)
• [MF Guide] (P230)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (P49)
• [Monitor Info. Disp.] (P231)
• [Rec Area] (P231)
• [Video-Priority Display] (P231)
• [Menu Guide] (P231)
[Lens / Others]
• [Lens Position Resume] (P231)
• [Power Zoom Lens] (P151)
• [Face Recog.] (P232)
• [Profile Setup] (P234)
9. Using Menu Functions
224
You can adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for every 1/3 EV.
Settings: [1/3 EV]/[1 EV]
ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum [ISO100].
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is
turned off.
When [ON] is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release
[AF/AE LOCK]. Press the button again to cancel the lock.
Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
> [Custom] > [Exposure]
[ISO Increments]
[Extended ISO]
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[Shutter AF]
[Half Press Release]
MENU
MENU
225
9. Using Menu Functions
As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and
focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed.
The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is active.
AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way
making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions.
[Quick AF]
• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Preview Mode
– In low light situations
[Eye Sensor AF]
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in dimly lit conditions.
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display] Sets whether to display the assist screen in a window or full screen.
[AF Assist Lamp]
• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.5 m (11 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-HSA12035) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.5 m (11 feet)
• Remove the lens hood.
• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/
H-FS12060/H-HSA12035) is used, but it does not affect the performance.
• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens
with large diameter is used.
• The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases.
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
9. Using Menu Functions
226
Set whether to enable recording even when focus is not achieved with Auto Focus.
• Different settings can be applied to different Focus Mode settings ([AFS/AFF], [AFC]).
When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to [AFS] or
set AF Lock using [AF/AE LOCK]), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
• Available settings vary depending on the lens used.
When an interchangeable lens having a focus ring (H-ES12060/H-FS12060/H-HSA12035)
is used
When an interchangeable lens with no focus ring is used
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a
full screen display.
[Focus/Release Priority]
[FOCUS] Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE] Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing and
shutter release timing.
[RELEASE] Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
• In the following cases, [RELEASE] operates as [BALANCE].
– In Manual Focus
– When recording with [6K/4K Burst]
– When recording with the Post Focus
function
– When recording with the Self-timer
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only
when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When [Half Press Release] is set to [ON]
– When recording with the Touch Shutter
– When recording remotely with a smartphone
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by pressing [ ].
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.
[] The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[OFF] The screen is not be enlarged.
• MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– When using the Digital Zoom
[MF Assist Display]
227
9. Using Menu Functions
If you select [CUSTOM], you can customise the Quick Menu settings. (P59)
Sets the control functions to be disabled with the function button [Operation Lock]. If you
set one of the following items to [ON], the corresponding control functions will be disabled
when the operation lock function is used.
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
Enables/disables the Touch operation.
> [Custom] > [Operation]
[Q.MENU]
[Operation Lock Setting]
[Cursor] Disables the functions of the cursor buttons, the [MENU/SET] button, and
the control dial.
[Joystick] Disables the functions of the joystick.
[Touch Screen] Disables the touch functions of the touch panel.
[Video Button]
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] All touch operations.
[Touch Tab] Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF] Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus ([AF]) or adjust the
focus and brightness ([AF+AE]). (P100)
[Touch Pad AF] Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the
viewfinder is in use. (P99)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
228
Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.
• [Duration Time (6K/4K PHOTO)] works only for 6K/4K photo recording, while [Duration Time
(Post Focus)] works only for Post Focus recording.
• If you set [Playback Operation Priority] to [ON], you can perform certain playback operations
during Auto Review. For example, you can switch between different types of playback screens
or delete pictures.
• If you select [HOLD], the picture taken stays displayed until the shutter button is pressed
halfway. [Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording
screen in Manual Exposure Mode.
In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is
being adjusted manually.
• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing
you to achieve a more precise focus.
• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows.
> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display]
[Auto Review]
[Monochrome Live View]
• Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the connected
device.
• Recorded images will not be affected.
[Constant Preview]
• This function does not work when using the flash.
[Peaking]
[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]
[Display Color]
[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)
[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)
[ ] (Yellow-green) [ ] (Green)
[ ] (Pink) [ ] (Red)
[ ] (White) [ ] (Grey)
• Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW]) > [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) > [OFF].
• [Peaking] does not work with [Rough Monochrome] in Creative Control Mode.
MENU
229
9. Using Menu Functions
Display the histogram.
You can set the position by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.
• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black
to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
Adark
Bbright
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.
When [ ] is set, guideline positions can be set by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording screen.
The centre of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,
white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
[Histogram]
• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.
– During Exposure Compensation
– When the flash is activated
– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as when the lighting is low.
• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.
• The histogram is not displayed when [WFM/Vector Scope] is set.
[Guide Line]
[Center Marker]
[Highlight]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative (P105) referring to the histogram (P229) and then taking the picture again. It may
result in a better quality picture.
• This function is disabled during 6K/4K photo playback, playback of images recorded with the
Post Focus function, Multi Playback, Calendar Playback, or Playback Zoom.
9. Using Menu Functions
230
Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern.
Select [SET] to set the brightness to be processed as a zebra pattern.
• You can select a brightness value between [50%] and [105%]. In [Zebra 2], you can select
[OFF]. If you select [100%] or [105%], only the areas that are already white saturated are
displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be
processed as a zebra pattern will be.
Display the exposure meter.
When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows
you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.
AIndicator for (infinity)
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative (P105) referring to the histogram (P229) and then taking the picture.
• Displayed zebra patterns will not be recorded.
• If you assign [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (P60) in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu,
each time you press the function button to which the setting is assigned, the zebra pattern
toggles as follows:
[Zebra 1] > [Zebra 2] > [OFF].
When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], the setting toggles in the order of [Zebra 1] > [OFF], allowing
you to switch the setting quickly.
[Expo.Meter]
• Set to [ON] to display the Exposure meter when performing
Programme Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
• When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display
information for screen by pressing [DISP.].
• If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
[MF Guide]
2
00
0
60604.04.0
989898
SSSSSS
FF
250 125 60 30 15
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
231
9. Using Menu Functions
Display the recording information screen. (P50)
This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording.
You can switch screens, such as the recording screen or the on-monitor recording
information screen, to those that are suitable for motion picture recording.
Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to [ ].
Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that
is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.
[Monitor Info. Disp.]
[Rec Area]
• The recording area indicated is an approximation.
• [Rec Area] is not available when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function.
[Video-Priority Display]
• In Recording Mode, the available recording time A will be
displayed.
• The on-monitor recording information will be switched to those
of the motion pictures. (P325)
• The exposure compensation value display will be switched
within the available range for motion pictures. When adjusting
the exposure compensation, the range available only for pictures will be indicated as [ ].
• The icons for functions that are not available for motion pictures, such as the ones for the flash
or the number of pixels, will not be displayed.
[Menu Guide]
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others]
[Lens Position Resume]
14m57s14m57s14m57s
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
232
Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and
priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back
or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.
[Face Recog.]
[ON] Enables the Face Recognition function.
[OFF] Disables the Face Recognition function.
[MEMORY]
Allows you to register face images, or edit or delete registered information.
Face Settings
You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to
6 people.
1Press 3/4/2/1 to select the Face Recognition
frame that is not registered, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide.
• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)
cannot be registered.
• To display the description of the face registration,
press 1 or touch [ ].
3Set the item.
• You can register up to 3 face images.
[Name] It is possible to register names.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
[Age] It is possible to register the birthday.
[Add
Images]
(Add
Images)
To add additional face images.
• Select a blank face image frame to register a new
image.
(Delete) To delete one of the face images.
• Select the face image you want to delete.
Change or delete the information for a registered person
1Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face image to edit or delete and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Set the item.
[Info Edit] Changing the information of an already registered person.
• Perform step 3 in “Face Settings”.
[Priority]
The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for
higher-priority faces.
• Rearrange and set the face priority.
[Delete] Deleting information of a registered person.
KEN
1HZ
233
9. Using Menu Functions
• The following functions will also work with the Face Recognition function.
In Recording Mode
– Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face¢
In Playback Mode
– Display of name and age
¢Names of up to 3 people are displayed.
Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the
order of registration.
Point of recording when registering the face images
• Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making
sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows
are not covered with hair when registering.
• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when
registering.
(Flash will not flash during registration.)
(Good example for registering)
When face is not recognised during recording
• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or
angles. (P232)
• Additionally register at the location of recording.
• When a person who is registered is not recognised, correct by re-registering.
• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for
registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.
• [Face Recog.] only works when the AF Mode is set to [š].
• During the Burst Mode, [Face Recog.] picture information can be attached to only the first
picture.
• When group pictures are played back, the name of the first picture of the set is displayed.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
9. Using Menu Functions
234
If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name
and age in months and years in the images.
You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using [Text Stamp]
(P257).
Settings: [ ] ([Baby1])/[ ] ([Baby2])/[ ] ([Pet])/[OFF]/[SET]
∫Setting [Age] or [Name]
1Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4 to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3Press 3/4 to select [Age] or [Name] and then press
[MENU/SET].
4Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/
SET].
[Profile Setup]
Enter [Age] (birthday)
Enter [Name]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• You can print out ages and names with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311).
Not available in these cases:
• [Profile Setup] is not available when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post
Focus function.
• Ages and names are not recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording ([ ] ([Video Priority])) (P168)
235
9. Using Menu Functions
Settings: [URL display]/[QR Code display]
Sets the times for the region where you live and your holiday destination.
• [Destination] can be set after setting up [Home].
After selecting [Destination] or [Home], press 2/1 to select an area, and press
[MENU/SET] to set.
“ [Destination]:
Travel destination area
ACurrent time of the destination area
BTime difference from home area
– [Home]:
Your home area
CCurrent time
DTime difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
: [Setup] menu
• [Online Manual] (P235)
• [Cust.Set Mem.] (P84)
• [Clock Set] (P39)
•[World Time] (P235)
• [Travel Date] (P236)
•[Wi-Fi] (P236)
• [Bluetooth] (P236)
• [Beep] (P237)
• [Headphone Volume] (P195)
• [Economy] (P237)
• [Live View Mode] (P238)
• [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] (P238)
• [Monitor Luminance] (P238)
• [Eye Sensor] (P239)
• [Battery Use Priority] (P319)
•[USB Mode] (P239)
• [TV Connection] (P239)
• [System Frequency] (P240)
• [Language] (P240)
• [Version Disp.] (P240)
•[Activate] (P241)
• [Folder / File settings] (P241)
• [Double Slot Function] (P242)
• [Save/Restore Camera Setting] (P243)
• [No.Reset] (P243)
•[Reset] (P244)
• [Reset Network Settings] (P244)
• [Pixel Refresh] (P244)
• [Sensor Cleaning] (P244)
• [Level Gauge Adjust.] (P245)
• [Format] (P31)
> [Setup]
[Online Manual]
[World Time]
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
236
• Press 3 if you are using Daylight Savings [ ]. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.)
Press 3 once more to return to the normal time.
• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time
difference from the home area.
[Travel Date]
[Travel Setup]
If you set [Travel Setup], elapsed days of your trip (i.e. which day of the
trip) based on its departure and return dates will be recorded.
• The travel date is automatically cancelled if the current date is after the
return date.
If the [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], [Location] will also be set to [OFF].
[Location]
If you set [Location], the name of the travel desination that you enter will
be recorded.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• You can display the elapsed days and travel destination during playback or stamp them on
recorded pictures in [Text Stamp] (P257).
• The elapsed days and travel destination can be printed out using the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311).
• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.
If you set [World Time] to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in
the clock setting and the travel destination setting.
• The [Travel Date] feature is disabled when recording [AVCHD] motion pictures.
• [Location] cannot be recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function] P264 [Wi-Fi Setup] P305
[Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth] P268, P269 [Location Logging] P282
[Remote Wakeup] P274 [Auto Clock Set] P283
[Auto Transfer] P278 [Wi-Fi network
settings] P279
237
9. Using Menu Functions
This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound.
Settings: [Beep Volume]/[E-Shutter Vol]/[E-Shutter Tone]
[Beep]
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [E-Shutter Vol] are set to [OFF].
[Economy]
[Sleep Mode] The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for
the time selected on the setting.
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi
network and has not been used for 15 minutes (approx.).
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not
been used for the time selected on the setting.
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
If you enable the automatic viewfinder/monitor switching function (P43)
and display the On-monitor recording information screen (P50) on the
monitor, the camera is automatically turned off when the camera has not
been used for the time selected on the setting.
• Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel [Sleep Mode], [Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)] and [Power Save LVF Shooting].
• To turn the monitor/viewfinder on again, press any button.
• [Economy] does not work in the following cases.
– When connecting to a PC or a printer
– When recording or playing back motion pictures
– During a slide show
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When using [Focus Transition]
– When using the HDMI output during recording
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] and [Power Save
LVF Shooting] are disabled.
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to [5MIN.].
9. Using Menu Functions
238
Set the frame rate of the recording screen (Live View screen).
Brightness, colour, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder is adjusted.
1Select the settings by pressing 3/4, and adjust with 2/1.
2Press [MENU/SET] to set.
[Live View Mode]
[30fps] Reduces the power consumption, extending the operating time.
[60fps] Displays movements smoother.
• When [Live View Mode] is set to [30fps] the image quality on the recording screen may be
worse than when it is set to [60fps], but this does not affect the recorded image.
• The viewfinder is fixed to [60fps].
[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]
• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is
in use.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
[Monitor Luminance]
„ [AUTO] The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
[MODE1] Make the monitor brighter.
[MODE2] Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
[MODE3] Make the monitor darker.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
• The monitor automatically returns to standard brightness if no operations are performed for
30 seconds when recording in [MODE1]. It will light up brightly again with button or touch
operation.
• When [AUTO] or [MODE1] is set, the usage time is reduced.
• [AUTO] is only available in the Recording Mode.
• The initial setting when using the AC adaptor (optional) is [MODE2].
…
1
…
2
…
3
239
9. Using Menu Functions
Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable
(supplied).
[HDMI Mode (Play)]:
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high-definition
TV connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. (P308)
[VIERA Link]:
If you select [ON], operations of the camera and the VIERA Link compatible equipment
connected to the camera with an HDMI cable are automatically linked, enabling you to control
the camera with the remote control of the VIERA Link compatible equipment. (P309)
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor
Switch]
This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic switching between the monitor and
viewfinder)/
[LVF] (viewfinder)/[MON] (monitor)
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will
also switch.
[USB Mode]
y [Select on
connection]
Select this setting to select the USB communication system when
connecting to another device.
z [PC] Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
{ [PictBridge(PTP)] Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
[TV Connection]
[AUTO] Outputs images at an output resolution suited to the
connected TV.
[C4K]/[4K/60p]/[4K/50p]/[4K/30p]/
[4K/25p]/[4K/24p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/
[720p]/[576p]/[480p]
Outputs images at the selected resolution.
• The output resolution for [C4K] is 4096k2160. Images
will be output in progressive format.
• The output resolution for [4K/60p], [4K/50p], [4K/30p],
[4K/25p] and [4K/24p] is 3840k2160.
• The available settings differ depending on the [System Frequency] setting.
• This will work only during playback.
• If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than
[AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Read the operating instructions for the TV.)
9. Using Menu Functions
240
You can change the system frequency of the motion pictures you record and play back.
• After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.
∫Once you change the system frequency
After changing the [System Frequency] setting, motion pictures may not be recorded or
played back if you continue to use the card that was inserted in the camera. We
recommend that you replace the card with another one and format (P31) it on the camera.
• If you continue to use the card that was inserted in the camera before you changed the setting,
the camera will operate as follows:
Set the language displayed on the screen.
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked.
[System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] For regions where the TV broadcasting system is NTSC
[50.00Hz (PAL)] For regions where the TV broadcasting system is PAL
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] This system frequency is for creating films
• By default, the system frequency is set to the broadcasting system of your purchase region.
• When [System Frequency] is set to a broadcasting system different from that of your
region, images may not be played back correctly on the TV.
• If you are not familiar with broadcasting systems or will not be creating any motion
pictures for films, we recommend that you use the default setting.
• If you changed the setting but are not sure about the system frequency for the broadcasting
system of your region, perform [Reset] in the [Setup] menu (P244).
[Rec Format] Recording Playback
[AVCHD] Recording is not possible You cannot play back motion
pictures recorded before you
changed the setting.
[MP4]/[MP4 (LPCM)]/
[MOV] Recording is possible
[Language]
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired
language.
[Version Disp.]
• When a supported optional item (XLR microphone adaptor etc.) is attached to the camera,
you can also check its firmware version.
• Press [MENU/SET] on the version display screen to display information about the software on
the unit.
241
9. Using Menu Functions
Use an Upgrade Software Key (DMW-SFU1: optional) to enable the extended functions of
the camera.
Settings: [Export Serial Code]/[Import Activation Code]/[Activation List]
Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.
¢When [Double Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (SD1)] and [Select
Folder (SD2)] are displayed.
[Activate]
• Perform [Export Serial Code] or [Import Activation Code] using the card in the card slot
1.
[Folder / File settings]
Folder name File name
1Folder number (3-digits, 100–999) 1Colour space ([P]: sRGB, [_ ]: AdobeRGB)
25-digit user-defined segment 23-digit user-defined segment
3File number (4-digits, 0001–9999)
4File extension
[Select Folder]¢Specifies the folder to which images are to be saved.
• The folder name is indicated with the number of files that can be stored.
[Create a new
folder]
[OK] Creates a new folder with the same 5-digit user-defined
segment as the current folder name setting.
[Change]
Allows you to redefine the 5-digit user-defined segment
before creating a new folder.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• A new folder with an incremented folder number is created.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the
folder number is displayed.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder
Number Link]
Uses the folder number of the folder name as the file
name’s 3-digit user-defined segment.
[User Setting]
Allows you to define and set the 3-digit user-defined
segment of the file name.
– Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
– For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
100ABCDE
 
PABC0001.JPG
 
9. Using Menu Functions
242
Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
• Each folder can store up to 999 files. If the number exceeds 999 files, a new folder with an
incremented folder number will be created automatically.
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the way up to
999. In this case, we recommend saving their data to a computer or similar device and
formatting the card. (P31)
[Double Slot Function]
[Recording
Method]
([Relay Rec])
Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card
runs out of free space during recording.
[Destination Slot]: [ ]/[ ]
• If you keep replacing the full card before the other card runs
out of free space during motion picture recording, you can
perform recording for a long period of time using 3 or more
cards. Replace the card when there is still sufficient free space
left on the card being used for recording.
([Backup Rec]) Records same images to the two cards.
([Allocation
Rec])
Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for
different image formats.
[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/[6K/4K Photo
Destination]/[Video Destination]
Notes on the Relay Rec. function
• In the following cases, recording cannot be relayed to the other card:
– When using [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)] for [6K/4K Burst(S/S)] recording.
– When recording a motion picture in [AVCHD] format
– When using [Loop Recording (video)] for motion picture recording.
Notes on the Backup Rec. function
• We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
• When recording a motion picture in [AVCHD] format, backup recording of motion picture is not
possible. Data will be recorded only to the one card.
• When different types of cards (SDHC/SDXC) are inserted in any of the following situations,
recording cannot be performed to the cards:
– When recording motion pictures (Excluding [AVCHD])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
243
9. Using Menu Functions
Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be
imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.
• Save/load setup information using the card inserted to the card slot 1.
• The setup information of the menu items below cannot be saved/loaded.
Settings: [Slot 1]/[Slot 2]
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save]
Saves the camera’s setup information to the card.
• To save new information, select [New File]; to overwrite an existing file,
select that file.
• When [New File] has been selected, the name of the file to be saved is
displayed on the screen.
[OK] Saves the file with an automatically created name
displayed on the screen.
[Change the
file name]
Allows you to rename the file before saving it.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters)
and numbers; up to 8 characters
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
[Load] Loads the setup information on the card to the camera.
[Delete] Deletes the setup information on the card.
[Creative Video] • [V-LogL View Assist]
[Motion Picture] • [LUT HDMI Display] of [HDMI Rec Output]
[Custom] • Data registered with [Face Recog.]
[Setup]
• [Clock Set]
•[World Time]
• [Travel Date]
• [Wi-Fi Setup] in [Wi-Fi]
• [Bluetooth]
• [Monitor Display]
• [Viewfinder]
• [Activate]
• [Level Gauge Adjust.]
• Only the setup information for this model can be loaded.
• You can save up to 10 sets of setup information to one card.
[No.Reset]
• When recording is performed after resetting this item, the folder number is updated and the
file number starts from 0001.
• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999. We recommend formatting the card
(P31) after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.
• To reset the folder number to 100, format the card first and then use this function to reset the
file number.
A reset screen for the folder number will then appear. Select [Yes] to reset the folder number.
9. Using Menu Functions
244
The following settings are reset to the default:
– Recording settings
– Setup settings ([Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] settings)
– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
– Setup/custom settings (except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile
Setup])
The following network settings are reset to the default:
– [Wi-Fi Setup] (Excluding [LUMIX CLUB] )
– Registered device information in [Bluetooth] and values in [Wi-Fi network settings]
It will perform optimisation of imaging device and image processing.
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging
device is performed.
[Reset]
• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset.
– The [World Time] setting
– The settings of [Travel Date] (departure date, return date, location)
– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback]
menu
• The folder number and the clock setting are not changed.
[Reset Network Settings]
• Always reset the camera when disposing or selling it to prevent personal information saved
within the camera from being misused.
• Always reset the camera after making a copy of personal information when sending the
camera in to be repaired.
[Pixel Refresh]
• Imaging device and image processing is optimised when the camera is purchased. Use this
function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[Sensor Cleaning]
• Dust Reduction Function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can
use this function when you see dust.
245
9. Using Menu Functions
Register frequently-used menus and display them in [My Menu]. You can register up to 23
menus.
> [My Menu] > [My Menu Setting]
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Adjust.] Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET]. The
level gauge will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge
Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
:[My Menu] menu
• [My Menu Setting] (P245)
[My Menu Setting]
[Add] Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
[Sorting] Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to
move and set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
[Delete Item]: Deletes a selected menu from the displayed menu list.
[Delete All]: Deletes all of the displayed menus.
[Display from
My Menu]
Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
246
∫How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]
• When [Single] and [Multi] are not available, select an image in the same way as when [Single]
is selected.
:[Playback] menu
• [Slide Show] (P247)
• [Playback Mode] (P248)
• [Protect] (P249)
• [Rating] (P249)
• [Title Edit] (P250)
• [Face Rec Edit] (P250)
•[Print Set] (P251)
• [RAW Processing] (P252)
• [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P123)
• [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction] (P124)
• [Light Composition] (P255)
• [Clear Retouch] (P256)
• [Text Stamp] (P257)
•[Copy] (P258)
•[Resize] (P259)
• [Cropping] (P260)
• [Rotate] (P261)
• [Video Divide] (P261)
• [Time Lapse Video] (P262)
• [Stop Motion Video] (P262)
• [Rotate Disp.] (P263)
•[Picture Sort] (P263)
• [Delete Confirmation] (P263)
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
[Single] setting
1Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2Press [MENU/SET].
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the
screen, the setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is
pressed again.
[Multi] setting
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
1Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
2Press [DISP.] to execute.
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can switch
the displayed card by pressing [Fn3].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn3
2.
Fn3
6HW&DQFHO
247
9. Using Menu Functions
You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronisation with music, and you can
do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.
You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion
pictures, etc.
We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a
TV.
> [Playback] > [Slide Show]
1Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 6K/4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus
function will also be played back.
• For images recorded with the Post Focus function, only an in-focus representative image
will be chosen and played back.
2Press 3 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
∫Operations during a slide show
[Slide Show]
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3Play/Pause 4Exit slide show
2Back to previous
picture 1Ahead to next picture
Reduce volume level Increase volume
level
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
248
∫Changing the slide show settings
You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the
slide show menu screen.
• Even if you select [Effect], it does not work during slide shows of 6K/4K burst files, images
recorded with the Post Focus function, or group pictures.
• When playing back the following pictures, the [Duration] setting is disabled.
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
Playback in [Normal Play], [Picture Only] or [Video Only] can be selected.
> [Playback] > [Playback Mode]
Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 6K/4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus function
will also be played back.
[Effect] This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one
picture to the next.
[Setup]
[Duration] • [Duration] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected
as the [Effect] setting.
[Repeat] [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound]
[AUTO]:
Music is played when the still pictures are played back,
and audio is played when the motion pictures are played
back.
[Music]:
Music is played back.
[Audio]:
Audio (only for motion pictures) is played back.
[OFF]:
There will be no sound.
[Playback Mode]
MENU
249
9. Using Menu Functions
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.
> [Playback] > [Protect]
Select the picture. (P246)
• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of protects you set for a group pictures is
more than 1000 pictures.
∫Cancelling all the [Protect] settings
Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can only cancel the setting of images on one card at a time.
You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
• Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
• Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10,
Windows 8.1, or Windows 8. (JPEG images only)
> [Playback] > [Rating]
1Select the picture. (P246)
2Press 2/1 to set the rating level (1–5), and press [MENU/SET] to set.
• When [Multi] has been selected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each picture.
(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
• The number of a group pictures will be displayed, if you set for a group pictures. [999+] is
displayed, if the group pictures is more than 1000 pictures.
∫Cancelling all the [Rating] settings
Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can only cancel the setting of images on one card at a time.
• In [Playback Mode], the [Cancel] is disabled.
[Protect]
Even if you do not protect pictures on a card, they cannot be deleted when the
card’s Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK].
• The [Protect] feature is only designed to work with this camera.
• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.
[Rating]
• The ratings levels “1” to “4” cannot be set for motion pictures in [AVCHD] format.
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
250
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped
in prints using [Text Stamp] (P257).
> [Playback] > [Title Edit]
1Select the picture. (P246)
•[’] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered.
2Enter the text. (P64)
You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.
> [Playback] > [Face Rec Edit]
1Press 3/4 to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE], and then press [MENU/SET].
2Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
3Press 2/1 to select the person and then press [MENU/SET].
4(When [REPLACE] is selected)
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET].
[Title Edit]
• To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.
• You can print out texts (comments) using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311).
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
[Face Rec Edit]
• Cleared information regarding the [Face Recog.] cannot be restored.
• The Face Recognition information of pictures in a group has to be edited at once.
(You cannot edit one picture at a time.)
• Editing of group pictures can be performed only on the first picture of each set.
MENU
MENU
251
9. Using Menu Functions
DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures
to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording
date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.
For details, ask at your photo printing store.
• When you set [Print Set] for a group pictures, the print setting for the number of prints will be
applied to every picture in the group.
> [Playback] > [Print Set]
1Select the picture. (P246)
2Press 3/4 to set the number of prints, and then press [MENU/SET] to set.
• When [Multi] has been selected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each picture.
(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of prints you set for a group pictures
is more than 1000 pictures.
∫Cancelling all the [Print Set] settings
Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can only cancel the setting of images on one card at a time.
∫To print the date
After setting the number of prints, set/cancel printing with the recording date by pressing
1.
• Depending on the photo printing store or the printer, the date may not be printed even if you set
to print the date. For further information, ask at your photo printing store or refer to the
operating instructions for the printer.
• The date print feature is disabled for pictures that are stamped with text.
[Print Set]
• The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999.
• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check
if this is the case.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures taken with [ ]
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
252
You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved
in JPEG format.
> [Playback] > [RAW Processing]
1Select RAW images with 2/1, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4 to select an item.
• You can set the following items. The settings you used for
the recording are selected when you start setting these
items.
[RAW Processing]
[White Balance]
Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you
select an item with [ ], you can process the image with the setting
at the time of recording.
[Brightness
correction]
Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between j2EV
and i2EV.
[Photo Style]
Allows you to select a photo style effect ([Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/
[Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[Scenery]/[Portrait]/[Cinelike D]/
[Cinelike V]).
[i.Dynamic] Allows you to select an [i.Dynamic] setting ([HIGH]/[STANDARD]/
[LOW]/[OFF]).
[Contrast] Allows you to adjust the contrast.
[Highlight] Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color
Tone]
Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When [Monochrome] or
[L.Monochrome] is selected in [Photo Style], you can adjust the
colour tone.)
[Hue]/[Filter
Effect]
Allows you to adjust the hue. (When [Monochrome] or
[L.Monochrome] is selected in [Photo Style], you can adjust the filter
effect.)
[Noise Reduction] Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
[i.Resolution] Allows you to select an [i.Resolution] setting ([HIGH]/[STANDARD]/
[LOW]/[OFF]).
[Sharpness] Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
[Setup]
You can set the following items:
[Reinstate Adjustments]:
Returns the settings to the ones you used during the recording.
[Color Space]:
Allows you to select a [Color Space] setting from [sRGB] or [Adobe
RGB].
[Picture Size]:
Allows you to select the size in which the image will be saved in
JPEG format ([L]/[M]/[S]).
MENU
253
9. Using Menu Functions
3Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• Refer to “How to set each item” on P253.
4Press [MENU/SET].
• This operation returns you to the screen in step 2. To set other items, repeat steps 2
through 4.
5Select [Begin Processing] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
∫How to set each item
• When [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution] or [Sharpness] is selected, the comparison screen
cannot be displayed.
• If you touch the picture twice, the picture will be enlarged. If you touch the picture twice when it
is enlarged, it will be reduced to the original size.
On the comparison screen, you can use the following operations to make adjustments:
ACurrent setting
• If you touch the picture at the centre, it will be enlarged. If you touch [ ], the picture will be
reduced to the original size.
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
2/1
/Dragging Selects a setting.
3[WB K
Set]
Displays the screen that lets you
set the colour temperature. (P110)
(only when [White Balance] is set
to [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ])
4[Adjust.]
Displays the screen that lets you
fine-adjust the White Balance.
(P111)
(only when [White Balance] is set)
[DISP.] [DISP.] Displays the comparison screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set] Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
Button
operation
Touch
operation Description of operation
2/1
/Dragging Selects a setting.
[DISP.] [DISP.] Returns you to the setting screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set] Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
+1
+1
+1 +2
+2
+2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
1
-
10
0
0
DISP.
DISP.
AWBc
AWBc
AWB
AWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
1
2
3
4
DISP.
0
9. Using Menu Functions
254
[Setup] setting
When you select an item, the screen that asks you to select [Reinstate Adjustments],
[Color Space], or [Picture Size] will be displayed.
1Press 3/4 to select an item, and press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Reinstate Adjustments], a confirmation screen will be displayed. Selecting
[Yes] will execute the operation and return you to the item selection screen.
2Press 3/4 to select a setting, and press [MENU/SET].
• The effects applied through the RAW processing on the camera and those applied through the
RAW processing on the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” (P312) are not completely
identical.
• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect ratio regardless of the
aspect ratio at the time of recording, but when you perform [RAW Processing] in the
[Playback] menu, they are processed in the aspect ratio or [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting at the time
of recording.
• Zoomed-in images recorded with [Ex. Tele Conv.] cannot be processed if you select a [Picture
Size] setting larger than their size at the time of recording.
• The [White Balance] setting of pictures taken with multiple exposures is fixed to the setting at
the time of recording.
• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation during
recording.
Not available in these cases:
• [RAW Processing] is not available when an HDMI cable is connected.
• You can process only the RAW images you recorded with the camera.
255
9. Using Menu Functions
Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image
that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to
combine the frames into one picture.
> [Playback] > [Light Composition]
1Press 2/1 to select the 6K/4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
2Choose the combining method, and then press [MENU/SET].
3Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen, and then press [MENU/SET].
The combined picture is displayed.
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first
frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.
[Light Composition]
[Composite Merging] setting
Select the frames you want to combine to superimpose brighter parts.
1Select the frames.
For information on button and touch operation, refer to
P126.
• Images displayed cannot be enlarged or shrunk or
shown as in slide view.
• [ ]/[ ] in touch operation becomes [ ].
2Press [MENU/SET].
The selected frames are remembered, and the display
goes to the preview screen.
Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to
perform the following operations.
– [Next]: Lets you select more frames for combining.
Goes back to step 1.
– [Reselect]: Discards the frame selected immediately
before and lets you select a different image.
– [Save]: Ends frame selection
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.
• You can select up to 40 frames.
4Press 4 to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET].
[Range Merging] setting
Select the first and last frames to superimpose the brighter parts of the frames
between them.
1Select the frame of the first picture, and press [MENU/SET].
The selection method is the same as in step 1 of [Composite Merging] setting.
2Select the frame of the last picture, and press [MENU/SET].
MENU
1H[W
5HVHOHFW
6DYH
9. Using Menu Functions
256
• The erasure operation can only be performed
by touching. [Clear Retouch] automatically
enables the touch operation.
> [Playback] >
[Clear Retouch]
1Press 2/1 to select a picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Drag your finger over the part you want to delete.
• The parts to be erased are coloured.
• Touching [Undo] will return the coloured part back to its
previous state.
3Touch [Set].
4Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET].
[Clear Retouch]
Erasing details (enlarging the display)
1Touch [SCALING].
• Pinching out/pinching in (P52) the screen allows
you to enlarge/reduce it.
• Dragging the screen allows you to move the
enlarged part.
2Touch [REMOVE].
• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging
your finger over the part you want to delete. The part
you want to delete can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.
• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.
• For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture.
(They cannot be edited at once.)
• When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures
separate from the original ones.
Not available in these cases:
• Not available when the viewfinder is in use.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– Pictures created from a motion picture which had been recorded when the motion picture
size had been set to [C4K] in [Rec Quality]
MENU
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
257
9. Using Menu Functions
You can stamp recording information on recorded images.
> [Playback] > [Text Stamp]
1Select the picture. (P246)
•[‘] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.
2Press 3/4 to select [Set], and then press [MENU/SET].
3Press [ ] to return to the previous screen.
4Press 3 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET].
[Text Stamp]
[Shooting Date] Stamps the recording date.
[Name]
[] ([Face Recognition]):
Name registered in [Face Recog.] will be stamped.
[] ([Baby/Pet]):
Name registered in [Profile Setup] will be stamped.
[Location] Stamps the travel destination name set under [Location].
[Travel Date] Stamps the travel date set under [Travel Date].
[Title] Title input in the [Title Edit] will be stamped.
• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you
specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.
• When you stamp pictures in a group, the stamped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– Pictures created from a motion picture which had been recorded when the motion picture
size had been set to [C4K] in [Rec Quality]
LISA
LISA
LISA
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
258
Copy images on the card to the other card.
> [Playback] > [Copy]
1Press 3/4 to select [Copy Direction], and then press [MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4 to select the copying method, and copy images.
• Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
∫Using a function button to copy images
When images are displayed one at a time, press the function button to which [Copy] is
assigned to copy the displayed image from the card that is playing it back to the other
card.
• If the image is not in a group, select the copy destination folder using one of the following
methods:
[Copy]
Copies card slot 1 images to the card slot 2.
Copies card slot 2 images to the card slot 1.
[Select Copy]
Copies selected images.
1Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2Select the picture. (P246)
• Select images in the same way as when [Multi] is selected.
[Copy All in Folder]
Copies all images in a folder.
1Select the folder to copy.
2After checking the images to copy, press [MENU/SET] to
start the operation.
[Copy All in Card] Copies all images on the card.
[Same Folder No.
as Source] Copies the image to a folder with the same name.
[Create a new
folder]
Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number and copies to
it.
[Select Folder] Specifies the folder to which the image is to be saved and copies to it.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Select Copy].
• The settings of [Protect] and [Print Set] in the [Playback] menu are not copied.
• It may take some time to finish copying.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures in [AVCHD] format cannot be copied.
• The following types of images cannot be copied from an SDXC memory card to an SD
memory card or SDHC memory card.
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
MENU
259
9. Using Menu Functions
To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of
pixels) is reduced.
> [Playback] > [Resize]
[Resize]
Select the picture and size.
[Single] setting
1Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
[Multi] setting
1Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
3Press [DISP.] to execute.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can
switch the displayed card by pressing [Fn3].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– Pictures created from a motion picture which had been recorded when the motion picture
size had been set to [C4K] in [Rec Quality]
MENU
20
20
20
5
5
10
10
10
L
4:3
M
4:3
S
4:3
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn3
2.
9. Using Menu Functions
260
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.
> [Playback] > [Cropping]
1Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
2Use the rear dial and press 3/4/2/1 to select the parts to be cropped.
• You can also touch [ ]/[ ] to enlarge/reduce.
• You can also move by dragging on the screen.
3Press [MENU/SET].
[Cropping]
Rear dial (right): Enlargement
Rear dial (left): Reduction
3/4/2/1: Move
• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.
• Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group.
(You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once.)
• When you crop pictures in a group, the cropped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [Cropping].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– Pictures created from a motion picture which had been recorded when the motion picture
size had been set to [C4K] in [Rec Quality]
MENU
261
9. Using Menu Functions
Rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.
• The [Rotate] function is disabled when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].
> [Playback] > [Rotate]
1Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
2Select the rotation direction.
[]:
The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.
[]:
The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.
Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended
for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.
Dividing a file is permanent. Decide before you divide!
> [Playback] > [Video Divide]
1Press 2/1 to select the file to divide, and then press [MENU/SET].
[Rotate] (The picture is rotated manually.)
[Video Divide]
2Press 3 at the location to divide.
• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing
2/1 while the file is paused.
3Press 4.
• The file may be lost if the card or battery is removed while
processing the dividing.
Not available in these cases:
• It may not be possible to divide a file at a point near the beginning or end.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When the recording time is short.
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
262
This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with
[Time Lapse Shot].
The created motion picture is saved in [MP4] recording format.
> [Playback] > [Time Lapse Video]
1Select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/
SET].
2Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to P138 for details.
Also refer to the notes on P138 for created motion pictures.
A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation].
Created motion pictures are saved in [MP4] recording format.
> [Playback] > [Stop Motion Video]
1Select the Stop Motion Animation group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/SET].
2Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to P138 for details.
Also refer to the notes on P138 for created motion pictures.
[Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
MENU
MENU
263
9. Using Menu Functions
This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the
camera vertically.
> [Playback] > [Rotate Disp.] > [ON]
You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
> [Playback] > [Picture Sort]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen
for deleting a picture is displayed.
It is set to [“No” first] at the time of purchase.
> [Playback] > [Delete Confirmation]
[Rotate Disp.] (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed.)
Not available in these cases:
• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless
the OS or software is compatible with Exif.
Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was
established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association)”.
[Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME] Displays images by folder name/file name. This display format allows you
to locate images in the card easily.
[DATE/TIME]
Displays images by recording date. If the card contains pictures taken with
more than one camera, this display format is convenient for looking for
images.
• When you insert another card, images may not be displayed by [DATE/TIME] first. The
images will be displayed by [DATE/TIME] if you wait for a while.
[Delete Confirmation]
[“Yes” first] [Yes] is highlighted first, so deletion can be done quickly.
[“No” first] [No] is highlighted first. Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided.
MENU
MENU
MENU
264
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
What you can do with the Wi-Fi®/Bluetooth®
function
These operating instructions refer to both smartphones and tablets as “smartphones” from
this point on unless noted otherwise.
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet (P274)
•Recording with a smartphone (P275)
•Playing back or saving images stored
on the camera, or uploading them on
social media sites (P277)
Explore more enjoyment possibilities
with Bluetooth®
You can connect to a smartphone that
supports Bluetooth low energy any time.
Connect to a smartphone to use a full range
of features.
•Connecting easily by pairing (P268)
•Turning on/off the camera by remote
control (P274)
•Sending recorded images automatically
(P278)
•Auto Cloud Backup (P279)
•Recording location information to the
camera’s images (P282)
•Synchronising the camera’s clock
(P283)
•Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone (P283)
Displaying pictures on a TV (P284)
Printing Wirelessly (P288)
Sending images to AV device (P289)
Sending images to PC (P290)
Using Web services (P292)
265
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function
∫Before Use
• Set the clock before using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function. (P39)
• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device equipped
with the wireless LAN function is required.
∫About the WIRELESS connection lamp
∫About the [Wi-Fi] button
In these operating instructions, a function button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred to
as the [Wi-Fi] button.
(By default, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn7] when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is
assigned to [Fn1] when the camera is in Playback Mode.)
• For information about the function button, refer to P60.
Steps for pressing [Wi-Fi] (in Recording Mode)
1Touch [ ].
2Touch [ ].
When the camera is not connected to Wi-Fi, press [Wi-Fi]. The camera will then be
ready to be connected to the smartphone. You can connect the camera directly to
the smartphone. (P270)
• When the camera is ready to be connected, you can press [DISP.] to connect with the same
settings as used previously. This is a convenient and quick way to establish a connection.
(P303)
Lit blue
Wi-Fi When the Wi-Fi function is ON or
connected by Wi-Fi
Bluetooth When the Bluetooth function is ON or
connected by Bluetooth
Blinking blue When sending data
Fn11
Fn11
Fn11
Fn8
Fn8
Fn8
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7
Fn9
Fn9
Fn9
Fn10
Fn10
Fn10
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn7
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
266
After connecting to a Wi-Fi network, you can perform the following operations by
pressing [Wi-Fi]:
• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may not be able
to perform some of these operations.
∫Describing method
When “select [Select a destination from History]”, etc. is
described in a step, perform any of the following operations.
[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select
a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending
Images]
Refer to P286 for details.
[Register the Current Destination
to Favorite]
Registering the current connection destination or the
connection method, you can easily connect with the same
connection method next time.
[Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
Button operation: Select [Select a destination from History]
with the cursor button, and then press
[MENU/SET].
Touch operation: Touch [Select a destination from History].
• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security.
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start
or the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred
depending on the details of your contract.
• Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is
terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.
• Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
267
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Connecting to a smartphone/tablet
• You need to install “Panasonic Image App” (referred to as “Image App” from this point on) on
your smartphone.
The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic.
•OS
• Use the latest version.
• Supported OSs are current as of February 2017 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
• When you operate the “Image App” on the smartphone that is connected to the camera via
Wi-Fi, [Help] in the “Image App” may not be displayed depending on the smartphone. In this
case, after terminating the connection to the camera, reconnect the smartphone to a mobile
phone network such as the 3G or LTE network or to a Wi-Fi router, and then display [Help] in
the “Image App”.
• Some of the screens and information provided in these operating instructions may differ from
your device depending on the supported OS and “Image App” version.
• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being
used.
For information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be
incurred depending on the details of your contract.
Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy P268
Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy P270
Connecting without using the password P270
Using a password to set up a connection P271
Using the QR code to set up a connection P271
Manually entering a password to set up a connection P272
Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App”
App for AndroidTM:Android 4.1 or higher
(Android 5.0 or higher is required to use the Bluetooth function)
App for iOS: iOS 8.0 or higher
(The Bluetooth function cannot be used with the iPad 2)
1Connect the smartphone to a network.
2(Android) Select “Google PlayTM Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” into the search box.
4Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it.
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
268
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a smartphone that
supports Bluetooth low energy. When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically
connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• Supported smartphones
Select the menu. (P55)
• The camera enters pairing standby mode and displays its device
name.
1Start “ Image App”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
2Select [Bluetooth].
3Turn on the Bluetooth.
4Select the device name displayed on the camera’s screen from the [Camera
enable to be registered] list.
• Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone will be made.
(For Android devices) A Wi-Fi connection will be made by selecting [Connection].
5Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
6On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID (the device
name selected in step 4) displayed on the camera.
• If the SSID is not displayed, it may be displayed after the Wi-Fi
function is turned off and on.
7Press the home button, and select “Image App” to display
“Image App”.
Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy
Android: Android 5.0 or higher equipped with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding
those that do not support Bluetooth low energy)
iOS: iOS 8.0 or higher (excluding the iPad 2)
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] >
[SET] > [Pairing]
On your smartphone
If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.
Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).
• If [Wi-Fi Password] (P305) is set to [OFF] on the camera, select [Wi-Fi Setup]. (At the time
of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF])
• If [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON] on the camera, you need to install the profile.
1Install the profile.
• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.
2Press the home button to close the browser.
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
269
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• The paired smartphone will be registered as a paired device after connected via Wi-Fi.
• Pairing needs to be set up only for the first connection. For the second and subsequent
connections: (P269)
∫Connecting to the paired smartphone (connecting for the second and subsequent
times)
Select the menu. (P55)
1Start “ Image App”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
2Select [Bluetooth].
3Turn on the Bluetooth.
4Select the camera (device name) you want to connect to from the [Camera
registered] list.
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect to one
smartphone at a time.
∫Enabling the Bluetooth function
Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
∫Terminating the Bluetooth connection to the smartphone and disabling the
Bluetooth function
Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
• The connection will be terminated and the camera’s Bluetooth function will be deactivated.
• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be deleted.
∫Deleting the pairing information of a smartphone
1Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
2Select the smartphone you want to delete.
When connected via Bluetooth, the camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
• (iOS devices) If you need to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen, follow
the on-screen message to change the setting.
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]
On your smartphone
If you set [Bluetooth] to [ON] on the camera in advance, you can make a connection just
by operating the smartphone.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [OFF]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [SET] > [Delete]
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
270
Connect to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• You can also connect via Wi-Fi to a smartphone that supports Bluetooth low energy by
following the same steps.
You can easily set up a direct connection to your smartphone without entering a password.
Select the menu. (P55)
ASSID
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the SSID is displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
2On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
3Start “ Image App”.
• When the connection confirmation screen is displayed on the
camera, select [Yes] to connect. (For first time connection only)
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen during Bluetooth connection. If the Bluetooth
function is enabled, but there is not connection, [ ] flashes.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered. If you try to register more than 16 devices, the
smartphone with the oldest registration history will be replaced.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered device information. (P244)
Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy
Connecting without using the password
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting & View]
On your smartphone
At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF].
Before connecting to a Wi-Fi network, ensure that the device displayed on the connection
confirmation screen is the one you actually want to connect to. When a wrong device is
displayed, if you select [Yes], the camera will automatically connect to that device.
We recommend that you set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON] if, for example, there is another
Wi-Fi device nearby. (P271)
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
271
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Connecting with a password further enhances security. You can scan a QR code or
manually enter a password to set up a connection.
Preparations:
(On the camera) Set the [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (P305)
∫Using the QR code to set up a connection
Select the menu. (P55)
ASSID and password
BQR code
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the QR code, SSID and password are displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1Start “ Image App”.
2Select [QR code].
• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display
[QR code].
• (For iOS devices) A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select [OK] to proceed.
3Use the “Image App” to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the
camera.
• If you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code will be enlarged.
4Install the profile.
• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.
5Press the home button to close the browser.
6Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting menu.
7On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
8Press the home button, and select “Image App” to display
“Image App”.
• (iOS devices) Steps 1 through 5 are not required from the second
time on.
Using a password to set up a connection
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting & View]
On your smartphone
If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.
Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
272
∫Manually entering a password to set up a connection
Select the menu. (P55)
ASSID and password
BQR code
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the QR code, SSID and password are displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
2On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
3Enter the password displayed on the camera into the
smartphone. (For first time connection only)
• If you are using an Android device, marking the box for password
display will allow the device to display the password as you enter it.
4Start “ Image App”.
To change the connection method, follow the steps below:
Select the menu. (P55)
or
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting & View]
On your smartphone
Changing the Wi-Fi connection method
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting & View] >
[DISP.] button
> [DISP.] button > [New Connection] >
[Remote Shooting & View] > [DISP.] button
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
MENU
Wi-Fi
273
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
When connecting via a wireless access point ([Via Network]):
1Select [Via Network].
• Follow the connection procedure described on P300 to connect the camera to a wireless
access point.
2Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting menu.
3Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point to which the camera is
connected.
4Start “ Image App”.
When directly connecting the camera and smartphone ([Direct]):
1Select [Direct].
• Select [WPS Connection]¢, and follow the connection procedure described on P302 to
connect the camera to the smartphone.
¢WPS is a function that allows you to easily set up a connection with a wireless LAN device
and make security-related settings. To check whether your smartphone supports the
function, refer to the operating instructions of the smartphone.
2Start “ Image App”.
1Set the camera to Recording Mode.
2Select the camera’s menu items to terminate the
Wi-Fi connection.
• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]
on the camera. (P266)
3On the smartphone, close “Image App”.
On the camera
On your smartphone
On the camera
On your smartphone
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi
Function] > [Yes]
(If you are using an iOS device)
On the screen of “Image App”, press the home button to close the app.
(If you are using an Android device)
On the screen of “Image App”, press the return button twice to close the app.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
274
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet
∫Required wireless connectivity mode
The wireless connectivity mode required varies depending on the function to be used after
connecting to a smartphone.
You can turn on/off the camera with your smartphone
by enabling the camera to keep its Bluetooth
connectivity active while it is turned off.
The function allows you to view images on the camera
placed in your bag, or turn on the camera left in a
separate place only when you record images with it.
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
3Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4On the smartphone, start up the “Image App”, and set the Bluetooth function to
a state in which a connection can be made (standby state).
5Operate the smartphone.
• The camera automatically turns on, allowing it to make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to
change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message
on the smartphone to change the setting.
Wireless connectivity
required Support for Bluetooth low energy
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that
support Bluetooth low energy.
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that do not
support Bluetooth low energy.
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that
support Bluetooth low energy.
• Indicates that the function requires you to connect to a smartphone
using both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Turning on/off the camera with a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Remote Wakeup] > [ON]
1Select [ ].
2Select [Remote operation].
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Wi-FiBluetooth
Wi-FiBluetooth
MENU
275
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫Turning off the camera with the smartphone
1Connect to a smartphone. (P267)
2Operate the smartphone.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, remote recording does not work:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
1Select [ ].
2Select [ OFF].
• When you turn on the camera with the smartphone, the status
indicator will flash.
• When [Remote Wakeup] is set to [ON], the Bluetooth function
continues to operate even after the camera is turned off, thus
causing the battery to drain.
Taking images via a smartphone (remote recording)
Wireless connectivity required:
• If the smartphone is already connected via Wi-Fi, proceed
to step 3.
1(When connected via Bluetooth) Select [ ].
2(When connected via Bluetooth) Select [Remote
operation].
• Make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need
to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen
message on the smartphone to change the setting.
3Select [ ].
4Record an image.
• The recorded images are saved in the camera.
• Some settings are not available.
Wi-Fi
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
276
∫Changing the camera’s dial settings, etc. with your smartphone
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during
remote recording.
Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
∫Taking a picture while jumping
When you hold your smartphone and jump, the camera’s
shutter can be released automatically as the smartphone
detects the peak of the jump.
Operate the smartphone.
[]>[]>Select the sensitivity.
• For details, refer to the help section in the “Image App” menu.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [Priority of Remote Device]
[Camera]
Allows you to perform operations with both the camera and the smartphone
during remote recording.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Allows you to perform operations only with the smartphone during remote
recording.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on
the screen, and select [End].
MENU
277
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
1Connect to a smartphone. (P267)
2Operate the smartphone.
• When you play a motion picture, image quality differs from
that of the actual recorded motion picture. In addition,
depending on the smartphone or conditions of use, the
image quality may deteriorate or the sound may skip during
motion picture or picture playback.
• You cannot save pictures in RAW format, motion pictures in
[AVCHD], [MP4] (only those with a size of [4K]), [MP4
(LPCM)] or [MOV] format, 6K/4K burst files, and images
recorded with the Post Focus function.
Playing back/saving images stored on the camera, or uploading them
on social media sites
Wireless connectivity required:
• If the smartphone is already connected via Wi-Fi, proceed
to step 3.
1(When connected via Bluetooth) Select [ ].
2(When connected via Bluetooth) Select [Remote
operation].
• Make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need
to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen
message on the smartphone to change the setting.
3Select [ ].
• You can switch the images to be displayed by
selecting the icon (A) on the top left of the screen.
To display images stored in the camera, select
[LUMIX(SD1)] or [LUMIX(SD2)].
(To play back the image)
4Touch the image to enlarge it.
(To save the image or upload it on a social media site
or other web service)
5Touch and hold an image, and drag it to save it.
Wi-Fi
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
278
The camera automatically transfers recorded images to a Bluetooth-connected
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
3On the smartphone, select [Yes] (Android devices) or [Wi-Fi Setup] (iOS
devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
– (iOS devices) Follow the on-screen message on the smartphone to change the
connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen.
4Check the send settings on the camera, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
• The camera will enter a mode where it can automatically transfer images and [ ] will be
displayed on the recording screen.
5Take pictures on the camera.
• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] in the [Setup] menu
cannot be used.
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera automatically
connects to the smartphone via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when you turn on the camera. Start up the
“Image App” to connect to the camera.
The camera will enter a mode where it can automatically transfer images and [ ] will be
displayed on the recording screen.
• If [ ] is flashing on the recording screen, images cannot be transferred automatically.
Check the status of the Wi-Fi connections to the smartphone.
∫To stop the automatic transfer of images
Set [Auto Transfer] to [OFF] on the camera.
• A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
• If you stop the automatic transfer of images before a transmission is completed, or in similar
situations, the unsent file will not be resent.
Transferring recorded images to a smartphone automatically
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Transfer] > [ON]
• You cannot automatically transfer pictures in RAW format, motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files,
and images recorded with the Post Focus function.
Wi-FiBluetooth
MENU
279
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
The camera detects the connection between the smartphone and wireless access point
and backs up images stored on the camera to a preset Cloud Storage.
• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible Cloud Storage.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
1The smartphone automatically connects to the wireless access point.
2Start up the “Image App” in foreground (a state in which the app can be operated).
3The camera automatically turns on.
4The camera automatically connects to the wireless access point connected in step 1.
5Images on the camera are automatically backed up to a Cloud Storage via "LUMIX
CLUB".
Once the setup procedure below is completed, you can back up data to a cloud
storage service just by performing step 2.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone for more information on how to set up a
connection automatically in step 1.
∫Registering the wireless access point you want to use to the camera (Setup 1)
• If you have connected the camera to the wireless access point you want to use before, the
procedure below is not required.
1Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
2Select [New connection].
3Connect to the wireless access point.
• Refer to the connection methods described on P300 to connect the camera to the wireless
access point.
Backing up images to a Cloud Storage automatically (Auto Cloud
Backup)
Wireless connectivity required:
AWireless access point BCloud Storage
Setting up Auto Cloud Backup
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Wi-Fi network settings]
Wi-FiBluetooth
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
LUMIX CLUB
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
280
∫Setting up “LUMIX CLUB” (Setup 2)
Preparations:
• Create an account for the Cloud Storage you want to use, and have the login information
available.
• Register to “LUMIX CLUB”. (P296)
1Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.
• If you are required to register an email address, operate following the on-screen
instructions.
3Select and register the cloud storage service you want to use in “Cloud Storage
Link Settings” in “Web service link settings”.
• Operate following the on-screen instructions.
∫Setting up “Image App” (Setup 3)
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Operate the smartphone.
• A wireless access point will be registered automatically after the camera connects to it via
Wi-Fi.
• You can register up to 17 wireless access points. If you try to register more than 17 devices,
the wireless access point with the oldest registration history will be replaced.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered wireless access points. (P244)
1Select [ ].
2Select [Bluetooth].
3Select [ ] for the connected camera.
4Enable Automatic Backup, and set backup settings.
• Below are the required backup settings. In addition to these settings, configure other
settings as necessary.
– Connection information of wireless access point (SSID): Select the wireless access
point registered in “(Setup 1)”.
– Cloud setting: Enter the login ID and password for the “LUMIX CLUB” used in
“(Setup 2)”, and select the cloud storage service you want to use in “Upload
destination”.
• You can try a connection test. Turn on the camera and run the test when the camera is
not connected to a Wi-Fi network. If the camera is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
follow steps 1 and 2 of “Terminating the Wi-Fi connection” on P273 to terminate the
Wi-Fi connection of the camera.
281
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Preparations:
The following conditions are required to use Auto Cloud Backup:
• Set the camera to a state in which it can be turned on with the smartphone (standby state).
(P274)
– Camera: [Bluetooth] and [Remote Wakeup] are set to [ON].
– Camera: The Camera On/Off switch is set to [OFF].
• Camera: The card’s Write-Protect switch is not set to [LOCK].
Start up the “Image App” in foreground (a state in which the app can be operated),
and run a backup.
• A backup will start if the smartphone is connected to the wireless access point set up in “(Setup
3)”.
• It may be possible to run a backup even if the app is running in background (a state in which it
cannot be operated).
Running a backup
• The first job backs up all images on the card. The second and subsequent jobs back up only
those that have not been backed up yet.
• If you change the backup destination, images that have already been backed up are not
saved to a new destination.
• A backup job will stop in the following cases:
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [ON]
– When you remove or insert the card
– When the battery runs out of power (The job will resume after the battery is recharged. With
the “Image App”, you can set the battery power at which backup jobs stop.)
• You cannot back up motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post
Focus function.
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
282
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, and the
camera performs recording while writing the acquired location information.
Preparations:
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded and [ ] will
be displayed on the recording screen.
3Take pictures on the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded pictures.
• To disable the recording of location information, set [Location Logging] to [OFF] on the camera.
Recording location information to the camera’s images
Wireless connectivity required:
AThe smartphone acquires
location information.
BThe smartphone sends the
location information.
CThe camera performs recording
while writing the location
information.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Location Logging] > [ON]
When [ ] is flashing
Location information is not acquired, so data cannot be written. Positioning with the GPS on the
smartphone may not be possible if the smartphone is in a location such as a building or a bag.
Move the smartphone to a location where positioning performance can be optimised, such as
one that offers a wide view of the sky, to try positioning. In addition, refer to the operating
instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
Not available in these cases:
• Location information is not written to motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format.
Bluetooth
GPS Bluetooth

MENU
283
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Synchronise the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those of a
smartphone.
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Select the camera’s menu. (P55)
• The [Clock Set] setting and the [Home] or [Destination] setting in [World Time], which are
all located in the [Setup] menu, will be synchronised with the corresponding settings of the
smartphone.
• To disable the automatic synchronization of the clock, set [Auto Clock Set] to [OFF] on the
camera.
Save the camera’s setup information to a smartphone. Since saved setup information can
be imported to cameras, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.
1Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P268)
2Operate the smartphone.
Synchronising the camera’s clock with a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Clock Set] > [ON]
Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
1Select [ ].
2Select [ ].
3Save or load setup information.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
When transferring setup information, the camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi
connection.
• (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to
change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message on
the smartphone to change the setting.
• Only the setup information for this model can be loaded.
• You can save or load the setup information of items identical to those in [Save/Restore
Camera Setting] in the [Setup] menu.
Bluetooth
MENU
Wi-FiBluetooth
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
284
Displaying pictures on a TV
You can display pictures on a TV that supports the Digital Media Renderer (DMR) function
of the DLNA standard.
Preparations:
Set the TV to DLNA waiting mode.
• Read the operating instructions for your TV.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P299)
3Select a device you want to connect.
• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.
4Play back pictures on this unit.
• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]. (P266))
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Playback on TV]
• If you display pictures using the Wi-Fi function, they cannot be output in 4K resolution.
• When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before
the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.
• The [Effect] and [Sound] settings for slide shows are not applied to the TV.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures and 6K/4K burst files cannot be played back.
• Images displayed on certain screens of the camera (multi playback screen, etc.) are not
displayed on the TV.
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
MENU
285
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images
When sending images, select the method for sending them
after selecting [New Connection] in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi]
in the [Setup] menu.
∫Images that can be sent
¢1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.
¢2 A motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent to [PC] if the file size is 4 GB or smaller. It
cannot be sent if the size is greater than 4 GB.
¢3 Excluding motion pictures recorded with their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality]
• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• Refer to the manual of the destination equipment or the web service for more information on
how to playback pictures.
A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.
• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
• You cannot change the sending settings while sending pictures.
Destination JPEG RAW MP4¢1AVCHD¢1, 2MP4(LPCM),
MOV
6K/4K Burst File¢1
Images recorded with the
Post Focus function¢1
[Smartphone] (P287) ±—±¢3—— —
[PC] (P290) ±± ± ± ±
¢1±
[Cloud Sync. Service]
(P295) ±—±¢3—— —
[Web service] (P292) ±—±¢3—— —
[AV device] (P289) ±—— — — —
[Printer]¢1 (P288) ±—— — — —
Send Images While Recording
• Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.
• If you cancel the transmission before its completion by, for example, terminating the Wi-Fi
connection, unsent files will not be resent.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu while sending.
5
5
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
286
Images can be selected and sent after recording.
Pressing [DISP.] after completing a connection allows you to change the settings for
sending such as the image size for sending.
Send Images Stored in the Camera
[Single Select] setting
1Select the picture.
2Select [Set].
[Multi Select] setting
1Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can
switch the displayed card by pressing [Fn3].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
2Select [OK].
• To terminate the connection, select [Exit].
• Details of the playback menu [Print Set] settings will not be sent.
Not available in these cases:
• Images recorded with a device other than the camera and images modified or edited on a PC
may not be sent.
Changing the settings for sending images
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([M], [S] or [VGA])
• [Auto] is available only for [Web service]. It changes the image size
according to the status of the destination.
[File Format]
(Destination: Only [PC])
[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
[Delete Location
Data]
(Destination: Only [Cloud
Sync. Service], [Web
service])
Select whether to delete the location information from images before
sending them.
[ON]/[OFF]
• This operation only deletes the location information from the images
that are set to be sent.
[Cloud Limit]
(Destination: Only [Cloud
Sync. Service])
You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs
out of free space.
[ON]: Do not send images.
[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn3
2.
287
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images to a smartphone/tablet
Preparations:
• Install the “Image App” in advance. (P267)
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P299)
3Select a device you want to connect.
4Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] >
[Smartphone]
On your smartphone
When connecting with [Via Network]:
1Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2Select the wireless access point you want to connect to, and set.
3Start “Image App”.
When connecting with [WPS Connection] in [Direct]:
1Start “Image App”.
When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]:
1Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit.
3Start “Image App”.
5When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures. (P285)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P286)
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
288
Printing Wirelessly
You can print pictures on printers that support PictBridge (wireless LAN)¢.
¢Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.
• For details on the PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printer, contact the respective
company.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P299)
3Select a printer you want to connect.
4Select pictures, and then print.
• The procedure for selecting pictures is the same as the one for when the USB connection
cable is connected. (P317)
• To terminate the connection, press [ ].
(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]. (P266))
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Printer]
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
289
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images to AV device
You can send pictures and motion pictures to AV devices in your house (home AV
devices).
Preparations:
When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting mode.
• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P299)
3Select a device you want to connect.
4Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
AWireless access point BHome AV device
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] >
[AV device]
5When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures. (P285)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P286)
• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may
take a while.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
290
Sending images to PC
Preparations:
• Turn the computer on.
• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC. (P290)
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting, change the
setting of this unit in [PC Connection]. (P305)
• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to 32 characters)
consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive folder may fail if the
account name includes non-alphanumeric characters.
∫When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
1Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P311)
2Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new
folder, or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually].
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
∫When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
(For Windows)
Supported OS: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
Example: Windows 7
1Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click.
2Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.
(For Mac)
Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.12
Example: OS X v10.8
1Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the
following order.
[File] [Get Info]
2Enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.
To create a folder that receives images
291
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P299)
3Select the PC you want to connect to.
• When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], and enter the
computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Mac).
4Select the folder you want to send.
5Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
Sending images to the PC
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] >
[PC]
6When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures. (P285)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P286)
• Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in
those folders.
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your
PC.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank character), etc., it
may not be recognised.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or less
alphanumeric characters.
• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the PC may not
be possible.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
292
Using Web services
You can send pictures and motion pictures to an social media site, etc. via “LUMIX CLUB”.
By setting up automatic transfers of pictures and motion pictures to the Cloud Sync
Service, you can receive the transferred pictures or motion pictures on a PC or
smartphone.
Preparations:
• Register to “LUMIX CLUB”. (P296)
• To send images to a web service, register the web service. (P293)
AWireless access point BWeb service CCloud Sync Service
When sending images to web service
• Images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera.
• If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address
registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.
• Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as
a title, the time and date when the images was taken, and the location where the image
was taken. Check this information before uploading images to web services.
• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.
of images uploaded on web services.
• When uploading images to the web service, do not delete images from this camera, even
after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly
uploaded to the web service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages
resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.
LUMIX CLUB
293
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible web services.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
Preparation:
Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use, and
have the login information available.
1Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.
3If your email address has not been registered to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, register
it.
4Select and register the cloud storage service you want to use in “Web service
link settings”.
• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network], and connect. (P299)
3Select a web service.
4Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
Registering web services
Sending images
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] >
[Web service]
5When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures. (P285)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P286)
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
294
∫Sending images in the camera to a web service with simple operations
1Display an image.
2Press 4.
(When group pictures are selected, press 3, and select
[Upload(Wi-Fi)] or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)].)
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].
(When group pictures are selected, select [Upload(Wi-Fi)]
or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)] after touch [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ], and then touch [ ].)
• If a screen is displayed asking you to select the connection method: (P300)
• If a screen is displayed asking yo to acquire a new login ID: (P296)
3Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
4Select a web service.
5Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
•Step
4, 5 are not necessary when you continue to send another image.
• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the
playback screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]. (P266)
To change the settings for sending images or web service
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step 1 and onwards again.
• You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] while using a Wi-Fi connection.
(P266)
• When group pictures are displayed continuously, all pictures in the group will be sent. When
group pictures are displayed one by one, the currently displayed picture will be sent.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
SUB
MENU
295
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫Using [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of February 2017)
You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (P296) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to
send a picture to a Cloud Folder.
For a PC, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311) to set up Cloud Sync settings. For a
smartphone, use “Image App” to set them up.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select [Via Network], and connect. (P299)
3Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P286)
When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]
• Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder so that they can be synchronised with
your device, such as a PC or a smartphone.
• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1000 pictures). Transferred
images are deleted 30 days after the transfer. Furthermore, when the number of stored
images exceeds 1000, some images may be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (P286)
setting even within 30 days after the transfer.
• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is complete,
images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the transfer.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] >
[Cloud Sync. Service]
4When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures. (P285)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P286)
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
296
Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).
• You can use the login ID acquired on your PC for the camera. (P297)
• You can merge the login IDs acquired separately on the camera and the smartphone into a
common login ID. (P297)
1Select the menu. (P55)
• Connect to the network.
Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
2Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set. (P300)
• Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the previously-used
wireless access point. To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
3Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree].
• Switch pages: 3/4
• Enlarge the display: (reset the enlarged display: )
• Move the position of the enlarged display: 3/4/2/1
• Cancel without registering information: [ ]
4Enter a password.
• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
5Check the login ID and select [OK].
•Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.
• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.
When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the
numbers.
About the [LUMIX CLUB]
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Please note:
• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected troubles, and
the service contents may be changed or added, without prior notice to the users.
• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice.
Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Set/Add
Account] > [New account]
MENU
297
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Preparation:
When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.
To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB”
website from your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in
advance.
1Select the menu. (P55)
• The login ID and password are displayed.
• The password is displayed as “ ”.
2Select the item to change.
3Enter the login ID or password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera.
4Select [Exit].
Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending
images on this unit to other devices or web services.
∫When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID:
1Connect this unit to the smartphone. (P267)
2From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID.
• A screen for setting a common login ID may be displayed after the camera and the smartphone
are connected.
∫When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs:
Change the login ID and password of either device.
• To change the camera’s login ID and password: (P297)
Checking or changing the login ID or password ([Set Login ID])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Set/Add
Account] > [Set Login ID]
To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
298
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.
Select the menu. (P55)
Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.
You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
• Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the
camera.
1Select the menu. (P55)
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
2Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
3Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”
account.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID.
4Select [OK].
Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >
[Terms of use]
Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Delete
account]
MENU
MENU
299
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
About Wi-Fi connections
When you use [New Connection], select the connection
method to set up a connection. (See below.)
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from
History] or [Select a destination from Favorite], the camera
connects to the selected device with the previously-used
settings. (P303)
When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select a connection method.
Wireless access point
[Via Network] Connects via a wireless access point. P300
[Direct] Your device connects directly to this unit. P302
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
300
• When [Via Network] is selected, except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to
the previously-used wireless access point. To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the
connection and security of wireless LAN devices.
For details about the compatibility and operation of the function, refer to the operating
instructions for the wireless access point.
Connecting via a wireless access point (via the network)
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a
connection.
Press the wireless access point
WPS button until it switches to WPS
mode.
e.g.:
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a
connection.
1On the camera screen, select the wireless access
point you are connecting to.
2Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen
into the wireless access point.
3Press [MENU/SET] of the camera.
[From List]
Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS
compatibility, or when you want to search for and connect to a
wireless access point. (P301)
301
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network authentication is
encrypted.
1Select the wireless access point you are connecting
to.
• Pressing [DISP.] will search for a wireless access point
again.
• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When
connecting with [Manual Input]” on P301.
2(If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• Except for the first-time connection, a connection will be made automatically using the
previously-used encryption key.
∫When connecting with [Manual Input]
• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, authentication type, encryption type,
encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.
1On the screen displayed in step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility
(connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input].
2Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set].
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
3Select the network authentication type.
4(When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key.
If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting by [From List])
[WPA2-PSK]
Supported encryption methods: [TKIP], [AES]
[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
[No Encryption] —
• Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless
access point.
• If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too
weak.
Refer to “Message Display” (P328) and “Troubleshooting” (P330) for details.
• Depending on your environment, transmission speed between the camera and wireless
access point may decrease. In addition, the wireless access point may not be available for
use.
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
302
Connecting the camera and another device directly (direct connection)
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]
1On the camera, select [WPS (Push-Button)].
2Set the device to WPS mode.
• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing [DISP.] on this
unit.
[WPS (PIN code)]
1On the camera, select [WPS (PIN code)].
2Enter the PIN code of the device into this camera.
[Manual Connection]
Enter the SSID and password into
the device. The SSID and
password are displayed on the
connection waiting screen of this
unit.
• If the destination is set to
[Smartphone], the password is not
displayed. Select the SSID to
establish a connection. (P270)
• Please also refer to the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
303
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
When the Wi-Fi function is used, a record is saved in the history. You can register records
as favourites. Using the history or favourites list, you can easily connect with the same
settings as used previously.
• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to connect
to the device.
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select item.
• You can display details of the connection by pressing [DISP.].
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select the history you want to register to favourites, and then press 1.
3Enter a registration name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones
([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]
[Select a destination from
History] Connects with the same settings as the previous ones.
[Select a destination from
Favorite] Connects with settings registered as favourites.
Registering records as favourites
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from History]
MENU
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
304
1Select the menu. (P55)
2Select the favourite history you want to edit, and then press 1.
Editing the items registered to favourites
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from Favorite]
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in
Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item to change
the display order.
[Change the Registered
Name] Enter text to change the registered name.
• Because the number of records that can be saved is limited, register frequently-used
connection settings as favourites.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] clears the history and the contents saved in [Select a
destination from Favorite].
• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless access point
other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change
the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the access point to be used is
set to the camera.
You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (P267)
• A connection may not be established easily when you try to connect to a network to which
many PCs are connected.
If a connection attempt fails, reconnect by using [New Connection].
MENU
305
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Select the menu. (P55)
Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during
remote recording. (P276)
You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a
smartphone.
• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by scanning a QR code. (P271)
Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID. (P296)
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is
required.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
1Press [MENU/SET].
2Enter the workgroup of the connecting PC.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the default setting.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]
[Wi-Fi Password]
[ON] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and password. (P271)
[OFF] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID. (P270)
[LUMIX CLUB]
[PC Connection]
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
306
You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
1Press [DISP.].
2Enter the desired device name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect
saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi function.
• If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu.
Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment.
• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the
Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function
such as a wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)
[Device Name]
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
[Setup] Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
[Cancel] Cancel the password.
[Network Address]
307
11. Connecting to other equipment
Watching 4K motion pictures on a TV/ Saving
4K motion pictures on your PC or recorder
∫Playing Back on a TV Screen
Preparation:
Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (P239) to [AUTO] or a setting with a
resolution of [4K] (if the size is set to [4K]) or [C4K] (if the size is set
to [C4K]).
• When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)], set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO] to
play back motion pictures recorded at a frame rate of 24p.
For settings other than [AUTO], it cannot output at 24 frames/second.
• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
Connect the camera and a 4K-compatible TV with an HDMI cable, and
display the playback screen. (P308)
• Even though the output resolution will be lower, you can also play them back by connecting the
camera to a TV that does not support motion pictures in 4K.
• When [System Frequency] is set to a broadcasting system different from that of your region,
images may not be played back correctly.
• You can also insert the card into a Panasonic TV equipped with SD card
slots that supports 4K motion picture, and play back 4K motion pictures
recorded with [Rec Format] set to [MP4].
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
∫Watching on a PC
To play back 4K motion pictures on a PC, use the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311)
• To play back and edit motion pictures in 4K, you need a high-performance PC
environment.
• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
You cannot dub 4Kmotion pictures to Blu-ray discs and DVDs with Panasonic recorders.
∫Storing on a PC
Refer to P310 for details.
You can use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311) to import 4K motion pictures to a
PC.
• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
Watching motion pictures in 4K
Storing 4K motion pictures
11. Connecting to other equipment
308
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen
You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the
HDMI cable.
Preparations: Turn this unit and the TV off.
1Connect the camera and a TV.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
2Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use.
3Turn the camera on and then press [(].
A[HDMI] socket (Type A)
BHDMI cable
CHDMI socket (on the TV)
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
• Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (P239)
• When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)], set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO] to
play back motion pictures recorded at a frame rate of 24p.
For settings other than [AUTO], it cannot output at 24 frames/second.
• No picture is displayed on the screen of this unit.
• When [System Frequency] is set to a broadcasting system different from that of your region,
images may not be played back correctly.
• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the
left and right of the pictures.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.
• HDMI output will be cancelled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected
simultaneously.
• No sound is output from the camera speakers.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
HDMI
309
11. Connecting to other equipment
Preparations:
Set the [VIERA Link] to [ON]. (P239)
1Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with
an HDMI cable (P308).
2Turn the camera on and then press [(].
3Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Turning this unit off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off, this unit is also turned off.
Automatic input switching:
• If you connect with an HDMI cable and then turn this unit on, and then press [(], the input
channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in standby
status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on link]
setting).
The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card
slot
• Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen.
• The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV
model.
• For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Using VIERA Link (HDMI)
What is the VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)?
• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations
when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable
for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not
guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with
VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices.
• This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional VIERA Link equipment.
• Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited.
• To play back the sound of a film during a slide show, set [Sound] to [AUTO] or [Audio] on the
Slide Show setting screen.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
11. Connecting to other equipment
310
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on
your PC
You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.
• Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of your PC.
∫PC that can be used
The unit can be connected to any PC capable of recognising a mass storage device.
• Windows support: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
• Mac support: OS X v10.5 to v10.12
AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or
folder
• When using Windows, import AVCHD motion pictures with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311).
• With a Mac, AVCHD motion pictures can be imported using “iMovie”.
Please note that importing is not possible depending on the picture quality.
(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)
311
11. Connecting to other equipment
Download and install software to edit and play back images with a PC.
• To download the software, you need to connect the PC to the Internet.
• It may take some time to download the software depending on the communication
environment.
This software allows you to manage images. For example, you can send pictures and
motion pictures to a PC and sort them by recording date or model name. You can also
perform operations such as writing images to a DVD, processing and correcting images,
and editing motion pictures.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
Download the software while it is available for download.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs10xe.html
(This Site is English only.)
• Download expiration: March 2022
• Operating environment
• For further information on the operating environment required to use the playback and editing
functions available for 4K motion pictures in 4:2:2/10 bit format and the cropping function
available for 6K/4K photos, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF
file).
• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac.
Downloading software
PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.0 XE
OS
Windows® 7 (32bit/64bit) SP1,
Windows® 8.1 (32bit/64bit),
Windows® 10 (32bit/64bit)
• For 4K motion pictures and 6K/4K photos, a 64 bit OS version of
Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10 is required.
CPU Pentium® 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Display 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or more recommended)
RAM 1 GB or more (32bit), 2 GB or more (64bit)
Free hard disk
space 450 MB or more for installing software
11. Connecting to other equipment
312
This is software to edit RAW format images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a
personal computer.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
• Operating environment
• For details on how to use the “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the “Help” or the
Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website.
This software allows you to edit motion pictures with ease.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
http://loilo.tv/product/20
• Only the trial version will be installed.
• For more information on how to use LoiLoScope, read the LoiLoScope manual available for
download at the site.
• “LoiLoScope” is not compatible with Mac.
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
OS
Windows
Windows® 7,
Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1,
Windows® 10
Mac Mac OS X v10.6 to v10.12
LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version
(Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10)
313
11. Connecting to other equipment
Preparations:
Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P311)
1Connect the computer and camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
• Please turn on this unit and your PC before connecting.
• Hold the plug, and plug the cable straight in or pull it straight out.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
(The USB connection cable supplied with DMC-GH3 or DMC-GH4 cannot be
used.)
AUSB socket (Type C)
BUSB connection cable (supplied)
2Press 3/4 to select [PC], and then press [MENU/SET].
• If [USB Mode] (P239) is set to [PC] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be
automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.
3Copy the images to a PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• Do not delete or move copied files or folders in Windows Explorer.
When viewing in “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, you will not be able to play back or edit.
Transferring images to a PC
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining
battery power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the status
indicator blinks and the alarm beeps.
Disconnect the USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
11. Connecting to other equipment
314
∫Copying to a PC without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (For Mac)
Even if you are using a Mac, or in any situation where “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” cannot be
installed, you can still copy files and folders by connecting the camera to the computer and
then dragging and dropping them to it.
• The content (folder structure) on the card of this unit is as follows.
For Windows: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed in [Computer]
For Mac: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed on the desktop
•Card
CAMSET: The camera’s setup
information
DCIM: Images
1Folder number
2Colour space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
3File number
4JPG: Still pictures
MP4: [MP4] Motion pictures
MOV: [MOV] Motion pictures
RW2: Pictures in RAW files
MISC: DPOF print
AVCHD: [AVCHD] Motion pictures
AVCHD
DCIM
100XXXXX
101XXXXX
999XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
PXXX0999.JPG
PRIVATE
MISC
CAMSET
AD_LUMIX
315
11. Connecting to other equipment
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a
Recorder
If you insert card holding content recorded with this unit into a
Panasonic recorder, you can dub the content to a Blu-ray Disc or
DVD etc.
Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other
devices will vary depending on the file format. (JPEG, RAW,
AVCHD, MP4 or MOV).
• 6K/4K burst files (MP4 format) are not supported by Panasonic recorders.
Dubbing can be performed when the camera and a
Panasonic recorder with a USB socket are connected
with a USB connection cable.
• Use the card slot 1.
• See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and playing
back.
11. Connecting to other equipment
316
Printing the Pictures
If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to
be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s monitor.
• Group pictures will not be displayed as group pictures but as single pictures.
• Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of your printer.
Preparations:
Turn on the camera and the printer.
Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures.
1Press [(] on the camera.
2Rotate the rear dial to the left to display the multi playback screen,
and press [Fn3] to select the card to display the images you want to
print.
• You can only print images on one card at a time. You cannot change the displayed card
while a printer is connected.
• You can also select the card to be displayed using the function button [Slot Change]
(P63).
3Connect the printer and camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
• Hold the plug, and plug the cable straight in or pull it straight out.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
(The USB connection cable supplied with DMC-GH3 or DMC-GH4 cannot be
used.)
AUSB socket (Type C)
BUSB connection cable (supplied)
4Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then press [MENU/SET].
317
11. Connecting to other equipment
1Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
2Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/
SET].
1Press 3.
2Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
3Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining
battery power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the status
indicator blinks and the alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If
not printing, disconnect the USB connection cable.
• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [å] (Cable disconnect prohibit icon) is
displayed.
(May not be displayed depending on the type of printer used.)
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection
cable.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot
be printed.
Selecting a single picture and printing it
Selecting multiple pictures and printing them
[Multi Select]
Multiple pictures are printed at one time.
•Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures and then press [MENU/
SET].
(When [MENU/SET] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled.)
• After the pictures have been selected, press [DISP.].
[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.
[Print Set (DPOF)] Prints the pictures set in [Print Set] only. (P251)
[Rating] Prints all images with [Rating] levels between [¿1] and [¿5]. (P249)
PictBridgePictBridge
0XOWL3ULQW
3ULQW
11. Connecting to other equipment
318
∫Print Settings
Select and set the items both on the screen in step 2 of the “Selecting a single picture and
printing it” and in step 3 of the “Selecting multiple pictures and printing them” procedures.
• When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the
camera, set [Paper Size] or [Page Layout] to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on
the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)
• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.
• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if
this is the case.
[Print with Date] Sets date printing.
[Num.of prints] Sets the number of pictures to be printed (up to 999 pictures).
[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.
[Page Layout] Sets whether or not to add borders and how many pictures to be
printed on each sheet of paper.
• The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights
yellow during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the
printer.
• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the
remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.
• Only pictures taken in JPEG format can be printed. Those taken in RAW will use the JPEG
pictures that were simultaneously created. If an equivalent JPEG picture is not available, no
print will take place.
319
12. Others
Optional accessories
Using a battery grip (DMW-BGGH5: optional) improves ease of
operation and grip when held vertically. Installing a spare battery will
allow you to record for a longer time.
∫Setting a priority for the use of spare batteries
You can set which battery should be used when the battery is inserted to both this unit and
the battery grip.
Preparations:
• Turn this unit off, and then remove the terminal cover.
1Attach the battery grip to this unit, and then turn this unit on.
2Select the menu. (P55)
Battery Grip (optional)
> [Setup] > [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]: The battery in this unit is used first.
[BG]: The battery in the battery grip is used first.
• When the battery in the battery grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• You can assign a function of your choice to the [Fn] button of the battery grip. (P60)
• If the terminal cover is hard to remove, flip the cover’s corner by the camera’s recess toward
the centre.
• Read the operating instructions of the battery grip for details.
MENU
12. Others
320
If you use the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional), you
can avoid jitter (camera shake) when using a tripod and you can
keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with [B] (Bulb) or
Burst Mode. The shutter remote control works similar to the shutter
button on the camera.
By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play
back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.
The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor
(optional).
Shutter Remote Control (optional)
• Always use a genuine Panasonic shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional).
• Record with Creative Video Mode (P173) when using for motion picture recording. Motion
picture recording can be started/stopped with the shutter remote control.
• Read the operating instructions of the shutter remote control for details.
Not available in these cases:
• You cannot use the shutter remote control for the following operation.
– Cancelling [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] or [Power Save LVF Shooting]
AC adaptor (optional)/DC coupler (optional)
• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).
• When using an AC adaptor (optional), use the AC cable supplied with the AC adaptor.
• When the DC coupler is being mounted, the DC coupler cover opens, so the structure
ceases to be dust-proof and splash-proof.
Be careful not to allow sand, dust and water etc. to adhere to or enter the structure. After use,
check that there is no foreign matter attached to the coupler cover, and close it firmly.
• Also read the operating instructions for the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler.
321
12. Others
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display
• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (monitor
style) in the monitor.
In recording
98
98
98
2
00
00
2
00
2
00
60
60
603.5
3.5
3.5
AFS
AFS
AFS
BKT
BKT
BKT
L
4:3
0
0
BKT
BKT
BKT
AEL
AEL
AEL
BKT
BKT
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
ラュン
ラュン
BKT
BKT
BKT
×
×
Fn11
Fn11
Fn11Fn11
Fn8
Fn8
Fn8Fn8
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7Fn7
Fn9
Fn9
Fn9Fn9
Fn10
Fn10
Fn10Fn10
OFF
OFF
OFFOFF
OFF
OFF
OFFOFF
MINI
MINI
MINIMINI
ISO
ISO
SS
SS
SS
F
F
1
Recording Mode (P44)
Custom settings (P84)
Photo Style (P208)
‰Œ
Flash Mode (P156)
Flash (P157, 160)
Extra Tele Conversion (when
recording motion pictures)
(P148)
Recording format/Recording
quality (P163)
Recording format/Recording
quality (P163)/Variable Frame
Rate (P176)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio
(P205)
Extra Tele Conversion (when
taking still pictures) (P148)
Image effect (filter) adjustment
display (P81, 210)
Image effect (filter) setting
(P210)
P
C1
EXPS
EXPS
WL
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
MOV
100
M
420/8
FHD
LongGOP
12/24.00
p
L
4:3
EXM
4:3
EXPS
Card (displayed only during
recording) (P30)
No card
The card is full
Elapsed recording time¢1 (P162)
Simultaneous recording
indicator (P168)
Automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching (P42)
Peaking (P228)
Highlight Shadow (P212)
HDR (P219)/iHDR (P68)
Multi exposure (P220)
Digital Zoom (P150)
Electronic shutter (P217)
Variable Frame Rate (P176)
V-Log L View Assist (P186)
LUT HDMI display (P191)
Picture-taking during motion
picture recording (Photo
Priority) (P168)
8
m
30
s
ラュン
100%
MON
LUT
HDMI
V-Log L
12. Others
322
2
A›Quality (P207)
Focus Mode (P88, 101)
Focus Bracket (P141)
Post Focus (P128)
š
ØAF Mode (P91)
Face Recognition (P232)
AF Lock (P104)
Burst (P113)
6K/4K Photo (P116)
Self-timer (P133)
Battery indication (P22)
Battery Grip (P319)
Image Stabiliser (P143)
Jitter alert (P144)
Recording state (Flashes red.)/
Focus (Lights green.) (P43)
Focus (Under low illumination)
(P86)
Focus (Starlight AF) (P86)
Connected to Wi-Fi
Connected to Bluetooth (P270)
Location Logging (P282)
Histogram (P229)
3
Name¢2 (P232)
Number of days that have passed since the
departure date¢3 (P236)
Age¢2 (P232)
Location¢3 (P236)
Current date and time/Travel destination setting¢3:
“ (P236)
Exposure meter (P230)
Focal distance display (P151)
Step zoom (P151)
Time Stamp Recording (P171)
AFS
AFF AFC MF
AFS
BKT
A
F
L
LOW
STAR
4
AF area (P86, 95)
Spot metering target (P212)
Centre marker display (P229)
Self-timer (P133)
Mic level display (P170)
Mic Level Limiter (OFF) (P170)
TC 00:00:00:00 Time Code (P169)
XLR 96kHz/24bit XLR setting (P194)
Silent Mode (P216)
External Microphone (P192)
AE Lock (P104)
Metering Mode (P54, 212)
Programme Shift (P71)
3.5 Aperture value (P43)
Aperture Bracket (P141)
60 Shutter speed (P43)
Exposure compensation value
(P105)
Exposure Bracket (P140)
Brightness (P69, 83)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P74)
ISO sensitivity (P107)
LMT
OFF
A
E
L
AE
3.5
BKT
BKT
323
12. Others
¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second
¢2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup]
setting is set.
¢3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock
and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.
5
White Balance Bracket, White
Balance Bracket (Colour
Temperature) (P142)
White Balance Fine Adjustment
(P111)
VÐî
ÑWhite Balance (P109)
Colour (P69)
98 Number of recordable pictures
(P32)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P114)
Available recording time¢1 (P32)
Relay recording (P242)
Backup recording (P242)
Allocation recording (P242)
BKT
AWB
A
WBc
1
1
8
m
30
s
6
Touch tab (P227)
Touch zoom (P152)
Touch Shutter (P53)
Touch AE (P54)
Peaking (P228)
Function button (P61)
/
/
(P174)
Colour (P69)
Defocus control function
(P69, 83)
Brightness (P69, 83)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (P80)
One point colour (P80)
Position of the light source
(P81)
Image effect (filter)
adjustment (P83, 210)
Image effect ON/OFF (P210)
Image effect (filter) (P210)
Aperture value (P43)
Shutter speed (P43)
ISO sensitivity (P107)
Microphone level adjustment
(P170)
××
AE
Fn7
MINIMINI
F
SS
ISO
12. Others
324
On-monitor recording information
In recording
1
Recording Mode (P44)
F3.5 Aperture value (P43)
1/60 Shutter speed (P43)
Battery indication (P22)
Card (displayed only during
recording) (P30)
2
ISO sensitivity (P107)
Exposure compensation value
(P105)
Brightness (P69)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P74)
‰Œ
Flash Mode (P156)
Flash (P157, 159)
F 3.5
98
98
AWB
1/60
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS
C1
EXPSEXPS
ISO
AUTO
0
0
WL
3
Single (P112)
Burst (P113)
6K/4K Photo (P116)
Post Focus (P128)
Self-timer (P133)
Focus Mode (P88, 101)
š
ØAF Mode (P91)
A›Quality (P207)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio
(P206)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (P264)
Function button setting (P60)
4
Photo Style (P208)
VÐ
îÑ White Balance (P109)
Intelligent Dynamic Range
Control (P213)
Metering Mode (P212)
Relay recording (P242)
Backup recording (P242)
Allocation recording (P242)
98 Number of recordable pictures
(P32)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P114)
Available recording time (P32)
---- No card
AFS
AFF
AFC
MF
L
4:3
Fn
AWB
AWBc
1
1
AE
r
8
m
30
s
325
12. Others
On-monitor recording information ([Video-Priority Display])
In recording
1
Frame rate (P163)/Variable
Frame Rate (P176)
Aperture value (P43)
Shutter speed (P43)
Shutter speed (angle) (P185)
Battery indication (P22)
Card (displayed only during
recording) (P30)
0
48
AUTO
FPS
ISO WB
PHOTO STYLE
IRIS SHUTTER
00:00:00:00
AWB
TC
NDF
M
MOV
FHD
100M
24p
LongGOP
420/8
LR
MIC
LMT ON
F 3.5
1/60
5h04m
5h04m
FPS
48
IRIS
F
3.5
SHUTTER
1/60
SHUTTER
11d
2
Recording Mode (P44)
Exposure compensation value
(P105)
Brightness (P69)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P74)
Motion picture recording display
(stopped)
Motion picture recording display
(recording in progress)
Relay recording (P242)
Backup recording (P242)
Allocation recording (P242)
Available recording time (P32)
---- No card
Time Code (P169)
Recording format/Recording
quality (P163)
Mic level display (P170)/Mic
Level Limiter (P170)
3
ISO sensitivity (P107)
0dB Gain (dB) (P185)
Photo Style (P208)
V
ÐîÑ
2500K
White Balance (P109)
C1
EXPS
EXPS
0
8
m
30
s
00
:
00
:
00
:
00
TC
NDF
MOV
FHD
100M
24p
LongGOP
420/8
LR
MIC
LMT ON
ISO
AUTO
AWB
AWBc
1
12. Others
326
In playback
1
Playback Mode (P248)
Protected picture (P249)
Number of prints (P251)
Location Logging (P282)
Ü3Rating (P249)
åCable disconnect prohibit icon
(P317)
Motion picture playback (P197)
Save pictures from the 6K/4K burst
file (P123)
Create pictures from an image
recorded with the Post Focus
function (P130)
Continuous group picture playback
(P201)
Focus Bracket (P201)
‘Stamped with text indication (P257)
Elapsed playback time¢1 (P197)
2
Icon indicating the presence of a
marker (P125)
6K/4K Photo (6K/4K burst file) (P116)
Post Focus (P128)
Focus Stacking (P131)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio (P206)
Recording format/Recording quality
(P163)
60
60
60F3.5
F3.5
F3.5
0
0
AWB
AWB
AWB
1/98
1/98
1/98
2
00
00
2
00
2
00
L
4:3
1
1
3
3
SLF
SLFSLF
SLF
8
m
30
s
L
4:3
24
p
FHD
8bit
MOV
Variable Frame Rate (P176)
A›Quality (P207)
Battery indication (P22)
Battery Grip (P319)
Card slot (P28)
1/98 Picture number/Total pictures
Connected to Wi-Fi
Number of group pictures
Motion picture recording time¢1
(P197)
3
Clear Retouch completed icon
(P256)
Currently retrieving information icon
Playback (Motion Pictures) (P197)
Upload (Wi-Fi) (P294)
Group Display (P202)
Sub Menu (P294)
Silent Mode (P216)
Number of days that have passed
since the departure date (P236)
Multi Playback (P200)
Delete (P203)
4
Name¢2 (P232, 234)
Location¢2 (P236)
Title¢2 (P250)
Age (P232, 234)
5
Recording information
Time Stamp Recording (P171)
100%
SLF
8
m
30
s
SUB
MENU
67'$<
327
12. Others
¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second
¢2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face
Recog.]).
In playback
Detailed information display Histogram display
Photo style, Highlight shadow display White balance display
Lens information display
sRGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
5500
0
STD.
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
1
2/5
200
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
R
Y
B
G
3/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
4/5
200
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
5500K
1
G
M
AB
5/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2017.12. 1 10:00
1
Recording information (basic)
2
Recorded date and time/World Time (P235)
3
Card slot (P28)
100-0001 Folder/File number (P314)
4
Recording information (advanced)
5500 White Balance Colour Temperature
(P109)
Intelligent Dynamic Range Control
(P213)
HDR (P219)/iHDR (P68)
Intelligent Resolution (P213)
12. Others
328
Message Display
Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen in some cases.
The major messages are described below as examples.
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]
• This feature can only be used with pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
Perform formatting (P31) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.
[Cannot be set on this picture]
• [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], [Print Set], etc. cannot be set for pictures not based on the DCF
standard.
[Memory Card Error
Format this card?]
• It is a format that cannot be used with this unit.
– Insert a different card.
– Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P31)
Data will be deleted.
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is
attached.]
• Detach the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (P34)
Turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.]
• Detach the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the
camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
• Use a card compatible with this unit. (P30)
[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]
• An error has occurred accessing the card.
Insert the card again.
• Insert a different card.
[Read Error/Write Error
Please check the card]
• It has failed to read or write data.
Remove the card after turning this unit off. Insert the card again, turn this unit on, and try to
read or write the data again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
329
12. Others
[Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.]
• If you continue to use the same card after changing [System Frequency] (P240), motion
pictures may not be recorded. To record with the same card, reset [System Frequency] to the
original setting. To record motion pictures with the current setting, try the following:
– Perform formatting (P31) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.
– Insert a different card.
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]
• Depending on the [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture, the speed class rating
required for the card differs. 6K/4K photo recording requires a card that meets a particular
speed class rating. Use a card that meets the rating. For details, refer to “Recording of motion
pictures/6K photos/4K photos and speed class ratings” on P30.
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the speed class rating, the
data writing speed is too slow. We recommend making a backup and then format the card
(P31).
Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.
[A folder cannot be created]
• A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used.
Format the card on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P31)
If you execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to
100. (P243)
[This battery cannot be used]
• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine
Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or Panasonic.
• If the battery terminal is dirty, clean it and remove any objects.
[Failed to connect wireless access point]/[Connection failed]/[No destination
found]
• The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (P301)
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as well as
the status of other wireless devices.
[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.]/[Network disconnected. Transfer
stopped.]
• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.
Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after
specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
[Connection failed]
• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.
12. Others
330
Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (P330 to P338).
• The sound is caused by the In-Body Image Stabiliser. This is not a malfunction.
• The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery. (P21)
• [Economy] is enabled. (P237)
• When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.
>Use these functions only when recording with them.
• Is a Wi-Fi connection being used for a long period of time?
The battery can become flat quickly when connected to Wi-Fi.
>Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc. (P237)
• Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [FOCUS]? (P226)
You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus.
• Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar.
>If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
>Refer to P340 when the image sensor gets dirty.
• Is the AE Lock (P104) applied incorrectly?
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (P244) on
the [Setup] menu.
Battery and power source
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the camera.
The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on.
The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on.
This unit is turned off automatically.
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
Recording
Taking pictures is not possible.
The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.
The recorded picture is whitish.
The recorded picture is too bright or dark.
331
12. Others
• Check the drive mode setting. (P112)
• Are you using the bracket function? (P139)
• The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera.
• Is [Shutter AF] in the [Custom] menu set to [OFF]? (P224)
• Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [RELEASE]? (P226)
• Is the AF Lock (P104) applied incorrectly?
• The shutter speed will become slower and the Image Stabiliser function may not work properly
when taking pictures especially in dark places.
>We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P133) when taking pictures with a slow
shutter speed.
• Try the following:
>Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P107)
>Increase the setting for [Noise Reduction] in [Photo Style] or lower the setting for each of
the items other than [Noise Reduction]. (P209)
>Set the [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (P215)
• If you record a moving subject when using the electronic shutter or recording motion picture or
a 6K/4K photo, the subject may appear distorted on the picture. This is characteristic of MOS
sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a malfunction.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s
pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter (P217), lowering the shutter speed
may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• If noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a
fluorescent or LED lighting fixture when recording motion pictures, you can reduce the flicker or
striping by setting up [Flkr Decrease] (P221) and fixing the shutter speed. It is possible to select
a shutter speed from [1/50], [1/60], [1/100], or [1/120]. You can set the shutter speed manually
in the Creative Video Mode. (P173)
Multiple pictures are taken at one time.
The subject is not focused properly.
The recorded picture is blurred.
The Image Stabiliser is not effective.
The recorded picture looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
The subject appears distorted on the picture.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and
LED lighting fixture.
12. Others
332
• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
>Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P107)
• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture, etc., increasing the shutter speed
may introduce slight changes to brightness and colour. These are a result of the characteristics
of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting,
LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting, etc., the colours and screen brightness may
change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
• There may be defective pixels in the image sensor.
>Perform [Pixel Refresh] (P244).
• If you continue to use the same card after changing [System Frequency] (P240), motion
pictures may not be recorded. To record with the same card, reset [System Frequency] to the
original setting. To record motion pictures with the current setting, try the following:
– Perform formatting (P31) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.
– Insert a different card.
• You may not be able to record for a short while after turning this unit on when using a large
capacity card.
• When the ambient temperature is high or motion picture is recorded continuously, the camera
may display [ ] and stop the recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.
• Depending on the [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture, the speed class rating
required for the card differs. Use a card that meets the rating. (“Recording of motion pictures/6K
photos/4K photos and speed class ratings” on P30)
• This phenomenon occurs when the camera is trying to record with highly accurate focus at a
reduced Auto Focus speed, and is not a malfunction.
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual
scene.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
Motion pictures
Recording motion pictures is not possible.
Motion picture recording stops in the middle.
Sometimes it is difficult to focus with Auto Focus when recording 4K motion
pictures.
333
12. Others
• With recording in a quiet environment, depending on the lenses used, the sound of aperture
and focus actions may be recorded in motion pictures.
Focus operation can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] (P167).
• While recording motion pictures, plugging the aperture of the microphone with a finger may
reduce the level of audio recording or audio may not record at all. Also be careful because the
operation sound of lenses can easily be recorded at this time.
• We recommend recording in Creative Video Mode if you are concerned about operational
sounds. (P174)
• When the electronic shutter is used, the flash is not activated. (P217)
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the flash is not activated. (P216)
• When [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting] (P237) is activated,
the external flash may not enter sleep mode automatically. When the camera is turned off, the
external flash may not turn off automatically.
>In such cases, turn off the external flash manually.
• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (P237) is
activated, and the Monitor/Viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the Monitor display may switch
to the Viewfinder display. (P43)
• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, or when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.
In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded sound is very quiet.
An operation sound is recorded in a motion picture.
Flash
The flash is not activated.
Even when the camera is put in sleep mode, the external flash does not enter
sleep mode.
Even when the camera is turned off, the external flash does not turn off.
Monitor/Viewfinder
The Monitor/Viewfinder turns off although the camera is turned on.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change
significantly for an instant.
12. Others
334
• It is only displayed on the monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer.
• Viewfinder of this unit adopts OLED. Screen burn-in may occur on the screen/viewfinder when
a same image is displayed for a long period of time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
• Being a characteristic of the viewfinder of this unit, this phenomenon is not a problem.
Recorded images are not affected.
• Is the card inserted?
• Is this a folder or picture which was processed in the PC?
If it is, it cannot be played back by this unit.
>It is recommended to use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P311) to write pictures from
PC to card.
• Has [Playback Mode] been set for playback?
>Change to [Normal Play]. (P248)
• Motion pictures recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
(P240)
>Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be corrected to black.
>We recommend recording images with Flash Mode set to [‰] or [Red-Eye Removal] set to
[OFF]. (P214)
Monitor and viewfinder do not switch when [LVF] is pressed.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colours appear on the Viewfinder.
The colour tone of the viewfinder differs from the actual tone.
Playback
The picture is not played back.
There are no recorded pictures.
Cannot play back motion pictures.
Red part of the recorded image has changed colour to black.
335
12. Others
∫General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency
operated nearby?
>Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away
from the device.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or
the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely affected. In
such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection. Move the camera away from the
metal surface.
∫About a wireless access point
• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.
• Check the radio wave condition of the wireless access point.
>Move this unit closer to the wireless access point.
>Change the location and orientation of the wireless access point.
• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access
point.
>Turn off and on the wireless access point.
>Check the settings of the wireless access point.
>When the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to broadcast, the wireless
access point may not be detected. Enter the network SSID to start the connection (P301) or
enable the SSID broadcast of the wireless access point.
• From the Wi-Fi setting menu on the smartphone, turn off and then on the Wi-Fi function.
• Some OS versions, including Windows 8, use two types of accounts: a local account and a
Microsoft account.
Be sure to use the user name and password for the local account.
Wi-Fi function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Radio waves get disconnected.
Wireless access point is not displayed.
This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.
When I try to set up a Wi-Fi connection with a Windows 8 PC, my user name and
password are not recognised, so I cannot connect to the PC.
12. Others
336
• The default workgroup name is set to “WORKGROUP”. If you changed the workgroup name,
the PC will not be recognised.
In [PC Connection] of the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, change the workgroup name to that of the PC
you are connecting to. (P305)
• Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely
from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.
>Please confirm [Clock Set] and [World Time] of the camera matches with time, date and
time zone in Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely,
please match them.
• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.
• Is the size of the image too large?
>Reduce the image size at [Size] (P286), and then send.
>Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (P261).
• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.
>Transmit closer to the wireless access point.
• File format of the motion picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (P285)
• Execute the [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (P244)
However, all the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu and [Bluetooth] menu will
be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
The PC is not recognised when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The camera cannot be
connected to PC via Wi-Fi connection.
Images cannot be transmitted to the web service.
It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.
Transmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be transmitted.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
337
12. Others
• Is the camera connected to the TV correctly? (P308)
>Set the TV input to external input mode.
• Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]? (P239)
>Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
>Turn this unit off and on.
• Set to [PC] in [USB Mode]. (P239, 313)
• Turn this unit off and on.
• Check if your PC is compatible with SDXC memory cards.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
• A message prompting to format the card may be displayed when connecting, but do not format.
• If the [Access] displayed on the monitor does not disappear, disconnect the USB connection
cable after turning this unit off.
• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
>Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB Mode]. (P239, 316)
• When using a printer with a Cropping or borderless printing function, cancel this function before
printing.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.)
• When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the 16:9 pictures can be
printed.
TV, PC and printer
The picture does not appear on the television.
VIERA Link does not work.
Cannot communicate with the PC.
The card is not recognised by the PC.
(SDXC memory card is used.)
The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer.
The ends of the pictures are cut at printing.
12. Others
338
• Depending on the lens you attach, it may move inside and create a sound. This is not a
malfunction.
• This is the noise of the Dust Reduction Function working (P340); it is not a malfunction.
• It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when this unit is turned on or off, and it is
not a malfunction.
• The sound, which is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture, is heard when the
brightness has changed due to, for example, zooming or the movement of the camera. This is
not a malfunction.
• Press [MENU/SET], select the [Setup] menu icon [ ] and then select the [~] icon to set the
desired language. (P240)
• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P225) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.
• The surface of the camera and the reverse side of the monitor may become warm during use.
This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera.
• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.
>[Please set the clock] message will be displayed; please reset the clock. (P39)
Others
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the attached lens.
The camera makes a noise when this unit is turned on.
There is a sound from lens unit.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
The camera becomes warm.
The clock is reset.
339
12. Others
Cautions for Use
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting
the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or
sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly,
turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (optional). Then reinsert the
battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/or sound
may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the
surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period
of time.
Optimal use of the camera
12. Others
340
• It may cause injury to the skin if you directly touch the metal parts of the unit in places
where temperature is very low [environments under 0 oC (32 oF), such as ski resorts or
places at high altitude] for a long period of time.
Use gloves or similar when using it for long periods.
• The performance of the battery (number of recordable pictures/operating time) may decrease
temporarily when using in a temperature between s10 oC and 0 oC (14 oF and 32 oF) (cold
places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude).
• The battery cannot be recharged in a temperature less than 0 oC (32 oF). (The [CHARGE]
indicator blinks when the battery cannot be recharged.)
• If the camera is used in cold places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude with snow or
water droplets adhered to the camera, some parts of the camera may become hard to move or
the sound may become dim with snow or water droplets freezing in the gap of the camera on/
off switch, speakers, and microphone. This is not a malfunction.
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC coupler (optional), or
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry, soft
cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,
and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the
camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
∫About dirt on the image sensor
This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera
body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image
sensor may appear on the recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in
a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
When using in a cold climate or at low temperatures
Cleaning
Dust reduction function
This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have
affixed to the front of the imaging device.
This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on, but if you see
dust, perform the [Sensor Cleaning] (P244) in the [Setup] menu.
341
12. Others
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when
you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower
brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.
• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
∫For care of the viewfinder/Eye cup
• Before you remove stains on the viewfiner and eye
cup or start other types of cleaning, remove the
eye cup (1). Blow away the dust on the viewfinder
surface with a blower (commercially available),
and wipe the surface lightly with a dry, soft cloth.
Attach the eye cup after the cleaning (2).
• Be careful not to lose the eye cup.
• Keep the eye cup out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. Uneven colours may appear on the monitor and
it may malfunction.
• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the Monitor/Viewfinder will be slightly
darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal
temperature of the camera increases.
About the Monitor/Viewfinder
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor/
Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or
green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. Though the Monitor/Viewfinder
screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision technology, some
pixels may be inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures
on a card.
12. Others
342
• Do not press the lens with excessive force.
• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it
to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window.
• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may
be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking
pictures.
• To prevent dust and other particles from accumulating on or entering
the lens, attach the lens rear cap when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the lens contact points A, do not place the lens with its
mount surface facing down. In addition, do not allow the lens contact
points to become dirty.
• To improve the dust- and splash-proof performance, the mount of the
interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/H-FS12060/H-HSA12035) is
embedded with the lens mount rubber. If you change the lens repeatedly, friction with the lens
mount rubber may leave scratches on the camera’s mount. However, those scratches do not
affect the performance of this unit. For the replacement of the lens mount rubber, contact
Panasonic.
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes
from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to
the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low,
the operating time of the battery will become shorter.
Always remove the battery after use.
• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, and store or keep away from metallic objects (clips,
etc.).
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the
terminals are damaged.
• Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera.
Bring charged spare batteries when going out.
• Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions
such as at a ski resort.
• When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied) and the AC cable
(supplied) so that you can charge the battery in the country that you are travelling in.
Dispose of unusable battery.
• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as
necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a
battery.
About the Lens
Battery
343
12. Others
• The [CHARGE] indicator may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic
wave. This phenomenon has no effects on charging.
• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
• The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
• Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean.
Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves
or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not bend or drop the card.
• The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the
card.
• Do not allow dirt, dust, or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not
touch the terminals with your fingers.
Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card
“Format” or “delete” using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, it will not erase the data in the memory card completely.
It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially
available computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the
memory card before transferring to another party or disposing.
Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user.
If a name or birthday is set for [Profile Setup]/Face Recognition function, this personal
information is kept in the camera and recorded in the image.
We recommend that you enable [Wi-Fi Password] and [Wi-Fi Function Lock] to protect
personal information. (P305 , 306)
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage
from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.
When requesting a repair, transferring to another party, or disposing.
• After making a copy of personal information, always delete information such as personal
information and wireless LAN connection settings that you have saved within the camera with
[Reset Network Settings]/[Delete account] (P244, 298).
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P244)
Charger
Card
About the personal information
12. Others
344
• Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations
are not possible due to malfunction.
When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to
“Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card”.
(P343)
When uploading images on web services
• Images may contain information that can be used for identifying individuals such as titles,
recording dates, and location information. When uploading images on web services, check
carefully, and then upload.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: [Recommended
temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF), Recommended humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH]
• Always remove the battery and the card from the camera.
• If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If
the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become
unusable even if charged.
• When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year.
Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or
a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long period
of time.
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it.
• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.
• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching
the camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when
turning it. Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the
camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the
pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in
contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to
attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.
• Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully.
When not using the camera for a long period of time
About the picture data
About tripods or unipods
345
12. Others
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg/35.3 oz) to the camera body,
do not carry the camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
∫Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs
and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any
damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN
device.
∫Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this
camera is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries
other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any
violations.
∫There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
∫Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as
near microwave ovens. These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the
2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.
∫Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use
When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched
automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use
(SSID¢) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be
considered as unauthorised access.
¢SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If
the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.
About the shoulder strap
Wi-Fi function
346
12. Others
• G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera
system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System
standard.
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation,
in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other
countries.
• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the
United States, the European Union and other countries.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
• “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive”
logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
• Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
347
12. Others
• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license
therefrom.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance®.
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a
certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
•“Wi-Fi
®” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are
trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.
• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware
Corporation. DynaFont is a registered trademark of
DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE
INCORPORATED.
• Other names of systems and products mentioned in
these instructions are usually the registered trademarks
or trademarks of the manufacturers who developed the
system or product concerned.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying
documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and
batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance
with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your
local municipality.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In
this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.

Navigation menu